2017 Jeep Wrangler (Includes Unlimited) User`s Guide

Whether it’s providing
information about specific
product features, taking a
tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident,
or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an
important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the
app, select your make and model and
enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google
Play and enter the search keyword
“JEEP” (U.S. market only).
17JK72-926-AA
Wrangler
Fourth Edition
User Guide
Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)
jeep.com /en /owners provides
special offers tailored to your
needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just
create an account and check
back often.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the
Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet by visiting:
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals or
www.jeep.com/en/warranty (U.S.);
www.owners.mopar.ca/en (Canada).
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2703574_17d_Wrangler_UG_ENG_032717.indd 1
2 01 7 W RA N G L E R U S E R G U I D E
3/27/17 10:10 AM
If you are the first registered retail
owner of your vehicle, you may
obtain a complimentary printed copy
of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect Manuals or Warranty
Booklets by calling 1 877 426-5337
(U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, resulting in a
collision and personal injury. FCA US
LLC strongly recommends that the
driver use extreme caution when
using any device or feature that may
take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such
as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is
2703574_17d_Wrangler_UG_ENG_032717.indd 2
dangerous and could lead to
a serious collision. Texting while
driving is also dangerous and
should never be done while the
vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to
devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
Important:
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the
important features of your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be
found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website
on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find
it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can
purchase replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.
This guide has been prepared to help
you get quickly acquainted with your
new Jeep brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common
questions. However, it is not a substitute
for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels
in your vehicle.
Driving and Alcohol:
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below
the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Not all features shown in this
guide may apply to your vehicle. For
additional information on accessories
to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer.
3/27/17 10:10 AM
Your new FCA US LLC vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under
some driving conditions. These are to assist
the driver and are never a substitute for
attentive driving. They can never take the
driver's place. Always drive carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the
comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be
used when driving because they take your
eyes from the road or your attention from
driving. Never text while driving, or more than
momentarily take your eyes off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to
make changes in design and specifications
and/or make additions to or improvements to
its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help
you quickly become acquainted with the important features of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information.
For complete owner information, refer to your
Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further details. For your convenience, the information contained on this site
may also be printed and saved for future
reference.
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By converting from paper to electronic delivery for
the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and
genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
1
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA
US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured that
it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding
an occupant in the driver's seat. Special
cases not complying with this rule will be
properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that
some details of the image do not correspond
to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived considering vehicles with steering
wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible
that on vehicles with steering wheel on the
right side, the position or construction of
some controls is not exactly mirror-like with
respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end
of this User Guide.
2
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the
relevant symbols in the tabs. There is anyway
a textual indication of the current chapter at
the side of each even page.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or
fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to
be observed when using this component.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out
of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government
notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures
that could damage your vehicle.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the
components of the vehicle, which could
cause accidents or injuries.
VEHICLE CHANGES/
ALTERATIONS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the
vehicle might seriously affect its safety and
road holding, thus causing accidents, in
which the occupants could even be fatally
injured.
3
4
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
6
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL. . . . . . . . . . .8
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
7
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
Air Outlet
Instrument Cluster
Radio
Assist Handle
Glove Compartment
Power Window Switches
7 — Climate Controls
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped
11 — Horn
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Seats
2 — Power Window Switches
3 — Radio
4 — Climate Controls
5 — Switch Panel
6 — Transmission Gear Selector
9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEY FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . .15
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . .
Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . .
To Enter Remote Start . . . . . . . . . .
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
. .15
. .15
. .16
. .16
. .16
. .16
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .17
Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . .18
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
STEERING WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . .32
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . .19
To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .19
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . .
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upper Half Door Window Removal —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Door Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) .
.20
.20
.21
.22
.22
.23
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Manual Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Manual Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . .28
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .29
Front Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Rear Head Restraints — 2 Door Model . .31
Rear Head Restraints — 4 Door Model . .31
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
EXTERIOR LIGHTS. . . . . . . . . . . .33
Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . .
Daytime Running Lights —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . .
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .
. .33
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.34
.34
.34
.34
.34
.34
.35
.35
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . .35
Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . .35
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
POWER WINDOWS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Windshield Wiper Operation. .
Intermittent Wiper System . .
Windshield Washers . . . . . .
Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Wiper/Washer —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.36
.36
.36
.37
. . . . . . .37
CLIMATE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . .38
Manual Climate Control Overview . . . . .38
Automatic Climate Control Overview. . . .42
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
12
REMOVABLE TOP
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Sunrider And Soft Top . . . .
Hard Top And Freedom Top .
Dual Top — If Equipped . . .
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.49
.57
.60
.60
HOOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Opening The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Closing The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
REAR SWING GATE . . . . . . . . . . .61
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . .62
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . .64
KEY FOB
the key fob unlock button is pushed, the
Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn
signal lights will flash twice.
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob with an ignition
switch.
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors. The turn signals will
flash, and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
Key Fob
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld
key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is
disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
Key Fob
1 — Unlock
2 — Remote Start — If Equipped
3 — Lock
To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the key fob unlock button
once to unlock the driver's door only, or twice
to unlock all the doors and swing gate. When
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped
with an automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory) position.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and
rotate the key to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch
lock cylinder.
14
Ignition Switch
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK or the
manual transmission into FIRST gear or
REVERSE, apply the parking brake, then
turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped
How To Use Remote Start
With the engine running, rotate the steering
wheel one-half revolution in either direction
(six o’clock position), turn off the engine and
remove the key. Turn the steering wheel
slightly in either direction until the lock engages.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
Remote Start Abort Message
• Hazard switch off
REMOTE STARTING
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system
has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an
automatic transmission to be equipped
with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
WARNING!
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could
cause serious injury or death.
• Ignition key removed from ignition
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails
to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• PANIC button not pushed
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• System not disabled from previous remote
start event
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Remote Start Aborted — Swing Gate Open
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is turned to the ON/
RUN position.
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start
• The hood is opened.
Push and release the remote start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the
vehicle will remain in the remote start mode
for a 15-minute cycle.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during remote start mode.
• For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the remote
start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition switch must be
cycled to the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the
following occur:
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500.
• Any engine warning lamps come on.
16
• The transmission is moved out of PARK.
NOTE:
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
General Information
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
Push and release the remote start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
15-minute cycle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time push of the
remote start button for two seconds after
receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push
and release the unlock button on the key fob
to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle
security alarm (if equipped). Then, insert the
key into the ignition and place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling
the engine. The system does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses key fobs that have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine
off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid
key to try to start the engine.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is
also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut
to fit the ignition or lock cylinder for that
vehicle.
During normal operation, after placing the
ignition in the on position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the
vehicle security light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone used
an invalid key to try to start the engine. Either
of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than ten seconds), it indicates that
there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key
fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle key fobs with
you to an authorized dealer.
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid key fobs, you can program new key fobs to the Sentry Key Immobilizer system by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional key(s) to match the
ignition and lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition.
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position
for at least three seconds, but no longer
than 15 seconds. Then, place the ignition
in the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In addition, the
Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Place the ignition in the LOCK position
and remove the second key.
18
4. Insert a blank key into the ignition. Place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single
chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle
Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate
that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three
seconds and then turn off.
The new key is programmed. The key fob
will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight
keys. If you do not have a programmed key
fob, contact your authorized dealer for details.
NOTE:
If a programmed key fob is lost, see your
authorized dealer to have all remaining key
fobs erased from the system's memory. This
will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining key fobs must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle key fobs must be
taken to an authorized dealer at the time of
service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
— IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior switches for door
locks are disabled. The vehicle security alarm
provides both audible and visible signals
when alarming. The horn will sound, the
headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
turn signals will flash repeatedly for three
minutes. If the disturbance is still present
(driver's door, passenger door, other doors,
ignition) after three minutes, the headlights,
park lamps and/or turn signals will flash for
an additional 15 minutes.
NOTE:
The Panic Alarm and the vehicle security
alarm are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic Alarm and the
vehicle security alarm to hear the differences
in the horn. In case one should go off in the
future, you will need to know which mode has
been activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System
To Disarm The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action
is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security
alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after
15 minutes, and then the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
To disarm the vehicle security alarm, you will
need to push the unlock button on the key
fob, or turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position. If something has triggered the
vehicle security alarm in your absence, the
horn will sound three times, and the exterior
lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
To Arm The System
The vehicle security alarm will set when you
use the Remote Keyless Entry key fob to lock
the doors and swing gate, or when you use the
power door lock switch while the door is open.
After all the doors are locked and closed, the
vehicle security light (located on the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about
16 seconds to signal that the vehicle security
alarm is arming. During this 16-second arming period, opening any door or the swing gate
will cancel the arming. If the vehicle security
alarm is successfully set, the vehicle security
light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the
vehicle security alarm is armed.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to
protect your vehicle; however, you can create
conditions where the vehicle security alarm
will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the key fob,
once the vehicle security alarm is armed
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door
handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, push the unlock button on the key fob
to disarm the vehicle security alarm. You may
also accidentally disarm the vehicle security
alarm by unlocking the driver's door with the
key and then locking it. The door will be
locked but the vehicle security alarm will not
arm.
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
WARNING!
• Unlocking the doors with the manual door
lock plungers or the driver's door lock
cylinder will not disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
DOORS
Manual Door Lock (Full Frame Doors)
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior rockertype door lock lever. To lock a door when
leaving your vehicle, push the rocker lever
forward to the lock position and close the
door. To unlock the door, push the rocker
lever rearward.
20
NOTE:
The ignition key that is used to start the
vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors,
swing gate, glove compartment, and console
storage.
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety
in a collision, lock the vehicle doors
when you drive, as well as when you park
and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition and lock your
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause severe personal
injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switch is located on each
front door panel. Push the switch forward to
lock the doors, and rearward to unlock the
doors.
WARNING!
Power Door Lock Switch
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety
in a collision, lock the vehicle doors
when you drive, as well as when you park
and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition and lock your
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause severe personal
injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
3. Repeat steps one and two for the opposite
rear door.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Child Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with Child-Protection Door
Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the
lock and rotate to the lock or unlock
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors
can only be opened from the outside when
the Child-Protection locks are engaged
(locked).
NOTE:
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the rocker lever rearward (unlocked
position), roll down the window and open the
door with the outside door handle.
21
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Upper Half Door Window Removal — If
Equipped
Grasp the half door window and pull upward.
Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped
1. Grasp the half door window and line up
the pins with the pockets in the lower
door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window
is fully seated.
Front Door Removal
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road
operation only.
Door Removal Warning Label
Hinge Pin Screw
NOTE:
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).
3. Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instrument panel by pushing the
tab at the base of the connector and
pulling down to disconnect.
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be
stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
22
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road
operation only.
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be
stowed in the rear cargo tray located under
the rear load floor.
Door Strap/Harness Location
4. Unhook the door strap from the body
hook. Be careful not to allow the door to
swing fully open as the mirror may damage the paint.
5. With the door open, lift the door to clear
the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the opposite order.
Door Removal Warning Label
NOTE:
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Remove the trim access door from the
bottom of the B-pillar.
23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Trim Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring harness connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the connector. This will unlock the connector tab,
allowing the harness to be disconnected.
Connector Unplugged
6. Unhook the door strap from the body
hook.
7. With the door open, lift the door to clear
the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the opposite order.
24
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front Seats
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped
Front Seat Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or
lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the handle to raise the seat, push
downward on the handle to lower the seat.
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the
seat, lift up on the bar located under the seat
cushion and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Adjusting Bar Location
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which
could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle
is parked. Serious injury or death could
result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Seat Height/Recline Lever
1 — Seat Height Adjustment
2 — Recline Lever
25
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seatback Recline
• The recliner and easy entry levers should
not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position.
Lean forward before lifting the handle, then
lean back to the desired position and release
the handle. Lift the handle to return the
seatback to an upright position.
Tip n' Slide Seats — Two-Door Models
This feature allows the front seats to be
rotated toward the instrument panel to allow
easier entry into the rear seats.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — TwoDoor Models
Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the
rear of the vehicle) and slide the entire seat
forward.
Driver's Seat
Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the
seatback to its full forward position.
Easy Entry Lever
To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate
the seatback upright until it locks and push
the seat rearward until the track locks.
NOTE:
• The front passenger seats have a track
memory, which returns the seat to just
past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position.
26
Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the
instrument panel.
Passenger Seat
In addition to Easy Entry, the front passenger
seat is also equipped with Tip n' Slide. This
feature allows for easier entry for rear passengers.
Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the
entire seat forward (Easy Entry).
With the seat forward, pull the entire seat
assembly toward the instrument panel.
Manual Rear Seats
Removing the Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be
necessary to reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
seatback forward.
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in the
forward tumble position. The seat must be
latched to all floor attachments when the
vehicle is in motion.
3. Push down on the release bar on each
side, and pull the seat out and away from
the lower bracket.
4. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not
properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats are
fully latched.
Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area with the rear seat folded
down or removed from the vehicle.
• The rear cargo space is intended for load
carrying purposes only, not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat
belts.
Seatback Release Lever
27
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door
Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat to allow for extended
cargo space.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be
necessary to reposition the front seat to its
mid-track position.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
Locate the release lever (upper outboard side
of seat), and lift it upward until the seatback
releases.
Slowly fold down the seatback.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period of
time. This is normal. By simply opening the
seats to the open position, the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape over time.
To Raise The Rear Seat
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
28
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have
difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
NOTE:
If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the
center shoulder belt will not be able to be
extended for use. If you cannot extend the
center shoulder belt, make sure your seatback is fully latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in
both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the driver and passenger to operate the seats
independently. The controls for each seat are
located on a switch bank near the bottom
center of the instrument panel.
ing the initial stages of operation. Then, the
heat output will drop to the normal HI-level.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately
30 minutes.
NOTE:
When a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
Front Heated Seat Switches
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the switch a second time to select
LO-level heating. Push the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the
heater will provide a boosted heat level dur-
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
WARNING!
• Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated
could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the
seat.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints
should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
29
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause
serious injury or death to occupants of
the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located
on the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as
it can go then push the adjustment button
and the release button at the base of each
post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate
height.
30
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
Rear Head Restraints — 2 Door Model
WARNING!
The rear seat head restraints are not adjustable. They can be removed to make it easier
to take out the rear seat. To remove the head
restraint, push the button on each of the two
head restraint guides and pull upward on the
head restraint. Replace the head restraint
before driving the vehicle with passengers in
the rear seat. To replace the head restraint,
insert the head restraint rods into the guides
and push downward on the head restraint
until locked.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the
vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the reinstallation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraint
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear
seat head restraints installed while passengers are occupying the rear seat. In a
collision, people riding in this area without the head restraints installed are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
Rear Head Restraints — 4 Door Model
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable
head restraints.
31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
To Adjust The Tilt Steering Column
MIRRORS
Tilt Steering Column
1. Push down on the lever to unlock the
steering column.
Interior Mirrors
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. The tilt lever is
located on the steering column, below the
turn signal lever.
2. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or
down, as desired.
3. Pull upwards on the lever to lock the
column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
32
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror
should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can
be reduced by moving the small control under
the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be
adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can
turn the feature on or off by pushing the
button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
left of the button will illuminate to indicate
when the dimming feature is activated. The
sensor to the right of the button does not
illuminate.
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Exterior Mirrors
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
The power mirror switch is located on the
center of the instrument panel, below the
climate controls. A rotary knob selects the
left mirror, right mirror or off position.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights And Parking Lights
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Turn Signal/Lights Lever
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the
solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Power Mirror Switch
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the
same direction you want the mirror to move.
Use the center off position to guard against
accidentally moving a mirror position.
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn
to the second detent for headlight operation.
33
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
The headlights come on at a low intensity level
when shifted into any position other than PARK
(auto transmission) or when the vehicle begins
to move (manual transmission).
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light
levels. To turn the system on, turn the end of
the multifunction lever to the AUTO position
(third detent). When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position. To turn the Automatic
System off, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The Daytime Running Light, on the same side
of the vehicle as the active turn signal, will
turn off automatically when a turn signal is in
operation and turn on again when the turn
signal is not operating.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back toward the steering wheel will return the
lights to low beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the
headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.
34
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode.
Front Fog Lights
The front fog light switch is located on the
multifunction lever. To activate the front fog
lights, turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever.
NOTE:
The fog lights will only operate with the
parking lights or the headlights on low beam.
Selecting high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not
flash, or there is a very fast flash rate,
check for a defective outside light bulb. If
an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator
bulb is defective.
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are left
on for more than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal
(right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the
center console. You can turn this light on and
off from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights or cargo
lights are left on after the ignition is turned
OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s
door is opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the
bottom of the rearview mirror. You can turn
these lights on and off from the switches in
the mirror or from the dimmer control in the
multifunction lever. These lights are also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry
System.
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the
extreme bottom position to fully dim the
instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is
opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to
increase the brightness of the instrument
panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the next detent position to brighten the
odometer and radio when the parking lights
or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the last detent to turn on the interior
lighting.
Cargo Lamp
The courtesy and dome lights will turn on
when the front doors are opened, by rotating
the control for the dimmer switch on the
multifunction lever fully upward, or if
equipped, when the unlock button is pushed
on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob.
The sports bar reading lights (available on
four-door models) can be turned on by pushing the switches, located on either side of the
lens. Push a switch a second time to turn the
light off.
The rear cargo light may be turned on by
pushing the lens. Push the lens a second
time to turn the light off.
When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to
stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle's battery.
35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS
Wiper/Washer Lever
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located at the end of the lever. For
information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in
this section for more information.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end
of the lever upward to the third detent past
the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
36
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the
wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of five intermittent settings.
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between
1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle
speed. If the vehicle is moving less than
10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be
doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will
start and continue to operate for two or three
wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then,
the intermittent interval previously selected
will resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position,
the wipers will operate for two or three wipe
cycles. Then, the wipers will turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles.
To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a
single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is
held down, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If
Equipped
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for rear wiper operation.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
to activate the rear washer. The washer pump
and the wiper will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Upon release, the wiper
will cycle two to three times before returning
to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position, the wiper
will automatically return to the “park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper
will resume function at whichever position
the switch is set at.
A rotary switch on the center portion of the
control lever (located on the right side of the
steering column) controls the operation of the
rear wiper/washer function.
37
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is
designed to make you comfortable in all types
of weather.
Manual Climate Controls
38
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of
moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the Knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When
the defrost mode is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise,
into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode
you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
NOTE:
Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.
Modes Control
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
40
Icon
Floor Mode
Description
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Temperature Controls
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. Operation of the system is quite simple.
Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE:
The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only.
42
Icon
Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of
moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode
you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
NOTE:
Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.
43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
Modes Control
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
44
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Icon
Front Defrost Mode
Description
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost mode is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel
to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
Manual Operation Override
Summer Operation
This system offers a full complement of
manual override features. The AUTO symbol
in the front ATC display will be turned off
when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Winter Operation
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various
weather conditions.
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and
the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
45
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage
Outside Air Intake
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter
the plenum, they could plug the water drains.
In winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
46
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust
and pollen from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter,
and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS — IF
EQUIPPED
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument
cluster display, the power window
switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The power window switches are located on
the instrument panel below the radio. Push
the switch downward to open the window and
upward to close the window.
Four-Door Models
The top left switch controls the left front
window and the top right switch controls the
right front window.
The lower left switch controls the left rear
passenger window, and the lower right switch
controls the right rear passenger window.
Wind Buffeting
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with
power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
48
Power Window Switches
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster display, the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially
open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized by adjusting the window opening.
REMOVABLE TOP
INFORMATION
2. Release the header latches from the loops
on the windshield frame.
3. Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves
forward to unlock the Sunrider links.
Step 2
Step 3
For complete owner information, refer to your Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further details.
Sunrider And Soft Top
Two Door Sunrider Open
Follow these simple steps to open the Sunrider feature.
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the
side.
49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Two Door Soft Top Down
4. Grasp the header and lift the top back.
Make sure the material is folded back as
shown.
Follow these simple steps to lower the Two
Door soft top.
1. Remove the side and back windows.
Step 5
6. Reposition the sun visors.
Step 4
5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows.
Wrap the straps around the bows as
shown. Repeat on the other side.
NOTE:
If you are going to be driving faster than
40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider feature
open, it is recommended that you remove the
rear window of the vehicle.
• To close the Sunrider feature, perform the
above steps in the opposite order.
50
Step 1
2. Fold and place the Sail Panels on top of
your Wrangler.
3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
Step 2
Step 3
4. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid
rearward over the Sunrider link to lock in
the link (Sunrider Models only).
Step 4
51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Door Sunrider Down
5. Release the Sunrider latch (both sides).
Follow these simple steps to open the Sunrider feature.
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the
side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops
on the windshield frame.
Step 6
Step 5
6. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
NOTE:
Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides
of the vehicle.
• To raise the soft top, perform the above
steps in the opposite order.
Step 2
52
3. Grasp the front side bow behind the
header, and lift the top.
4. Fold the top so that the material forms a
"W" as shown. Enter the vehicle and move
the material into two folds.
5. Fold back the front section of the top and
gently rest the header on top of the rear
portion of the deck.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 3
53
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Secure the top by using the two provided
straps. Each strap will wrap around the
side bow and Velcro to itself; use one strap
on each side of the vehicle.
• If you are going to be driving faster than
40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider feature open, it is recommended that you
remove the rear window of the vehicle.
2. Fold and place the Sail Panels on top of
your Wrangler.
• To close the Sunrider feature, perform the
above steps in the opposite order.
Four Door Soft Top Down
Follow these simple steps to lower the Four
Door soft top.
1. Remove the side and back windows.
Step 2
Step 6
NOTE:
• Failure to fold the fabric rearward will
allow the material to sag and may block
the rearview mirror.
Step 1
54
3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
4. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to
the rear.
Step 3
Step 4
5. Fold the top so that the material forms a
"W" as shown. Enter the vehicle and move
the material into two folds.
Step 5
55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Release the side bows by pushing down
on the latch above the front of the rear
doors.
Step 7
8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
Step 6
7. Push the top rearward to disengage.
56
Step 8
NOTE:
Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides
of the vehicle.
• To raise the soft top, perform the above
steps in the opposite order.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear
window curtain up unless the side curtains are also open. Dangerous exhaust
gases which can kill could enter the
vehicle.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the
elements. Do not rely on them to contain
occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident.
Remember, always wear seat belts.
CAUTION!
• Do not move your vehicle until the top
has been either fully attached to the
windshield frame, or fully lowered.
• The soft top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks,
spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member
of the vehicle and, thus, cannot properly
carry any additional loads other than
environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
2. Turn the rear fasteners (located on the
overhead speaker bar assembly) counterclockwise until they can be removed.
Hard Top And Freedom Top
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash. Window scratches and
wax buildup may result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the
top may result.
• Do not lower the top when the windows
are dirty. Grit may scratch the window.
Freedom Top Removal
Follow these simple steps to remove the front
panels.
Step 2
1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the
side.
57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from
the center of the roof panel.
Step 4
Step 3
4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located
above the shoulder belt anchorage).
5. Unlatch the header panel latches located
at the top of the windshield.
Step 5
6. Remove the left-hand panel.
To remove the right panel, follow the steps
above except for step three.
NOTE:
• The left panel must be removed before
removing right panel.
• Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top,
come with a Freedom Top storage bag that
allows you to store your Freedom Top
panels.
58
For complete owner information, refer to your Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further details.
CAUTION!
Hard Top Removal
Follow these simple steps to remove the hard
top.
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Freedom Top Removal” in the previous
section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx head screws that
secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near
the top of the door) using a #40 Torx head
driver (Four–Door Only).
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that
secure the hard top to the vehicle (along
the interior body side) using a #40 Torx
head driver.
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
clearance of the rear window glass. Lift
the rear window glass.
6. Locate and disconnect the wire harness
on the left rear inside corner of the
vehicle.
Step 6
7. Remove the washer hose (next to the wire
harness) by pinching the grips on hose
connector and pull downward.
8. Close the swing gate.
9. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
Place the hard top on a soft surface to
prevent damage.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into
the vehicle's interior.
• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
• The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks,
spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member
of the vehicle, and thus cannot properly
carry any additional loads other than
environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
• Do not move your vehicle until the top
has been either fully attached to the
windshield frame and bodyside, or fully
removed.
• The removal of the hard top requires four
adults located on each corner. Failure to
follow this caution could damage the
hard top.
59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dual Top — If Equipped
Wind Buffeting
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top,
you must remove one of the tops from the
vehicle.
Wind buffeting can be described as a
helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, adjust
the front and rear windows together.
• Two Door - If the soft top is removed, the
pivot brackets must also be removed from
the sport bar.
HOOD
• Four Door - If the soft top is removed,
ensure that the pivot bracket strap is installed onto the Soft Top pivot bracket before
removing the soft top from the vehicle. Remove the fasteners between the Soft Top
pivot bracket and the attach bracket to the
sport bar.
Opening The Hood
Release both the hood latches.
Pivot Bracket Strap
NOTE:
• The soft top was installed at the factory for
shipping purposes only.
• The soft top and the hard top are to be
used independently.
• For complete owner information, refer to your
Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further details.
60
Hood Latch Location
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch,
located in the middle of the hood opening.
Push the safety latch to the left side of the
vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to
push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch. Insert the support rod
into the slot on the hood.
Closing The Hood
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using
the key, Remote Keyless Entry key fob, or by
activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors.
To open the swing gate, push the button on
the gate handle.
To close the hood, remove the support rod
from the hood panel and place it in the
retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure
both of the hood latches.
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can
allow poisonous exhaust gases into your
vehicle. You and your passengers could be
injured by these fumes. Keep the flip-up
window closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when
closing the rear flip-up window, as damage
to the blade will result.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Swing Gate Handle
NOTE:
Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to close the swing gate (hard top models
only).
61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Power Outlets
There are three possible 12 Volt Power Outlets in this vehicle.
• The center console 12 Volt power outlet is
powered directly from the battery (power
available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• The front 12 Volt power outlet is located
below the climate controls in the Center
Console, and is powered when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN position. The
outlet can operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit or power accessories designed
for use with a standard power outlet
adapter.
• On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is also a 12 Volt power outlet
located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle. This power outlet has power available directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this
outlet also may discharge the battery
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Power Outlet — Center Console
Power Outlet — Front
62
Power Outlet — Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded
the fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object
in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — #M7 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Rear (If Equipped)
2 — #M6 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — #M36 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Console Bin
63
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter — If Equipped
Power Inverter
• A 115 Volt, 150 Watt AC power inverter is
located on the front of the center console.
• This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 150 Watts.
64
• The power inverter switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. To turn on the power outlet, push the
switch once. The indicator light will illuminate. Push the switch a second time to
turn the power inverter outlet off.
NOTE:
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet, the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually, unplug the device and plug
it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet
is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . .66
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .67
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . .68
Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Red Telltale Lights . .
Yellow Telltale Lights .
Green Telltale Lights .
White Telltale Lights .
Blue Telltale Lights . .
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . .76
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.69
.72
.75
.75
.75
65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
1 — Fuel Door Location Symbol
2 — Fuel Gauge
3 — Speedometer
66
4 — Tachometer
5 — Temperature Gauge
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in
the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
wheel. The instrument cluster display consists of the following:
The instrument cluster display features a
driver-interactive display that is located in
the instrument cluster.
• Compass Heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW,
SE, SW)
• Outside Temperature (°F or °C)
• ECO Display
• Digital Speedometer
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
• Tire Pressure Monitor System — If
Equipped
• Elapsed Time
• Vehicle Info
• Units Selection
Instrument Cluster Display
This system conveniently allows the driver to
select a variety of useful information by pushing the switches mounted on the steering
• System Status and Warnings (Door Open,
etc.)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
• Push the MENU button to scroll through
the main menus (Speedometer, Fuel
Economy, Miles To Empty, Tire Pressure,
Warnings, Timer, Vehicle Info, Units, System Warning, Personal Settings) or to exit
submenus.
• Push the right arrow button for access to
main menus, submenus or to select a
personal setting in the setup menu.
• Push the compass button to display one of
eight compass readings and the outside
temperature or to exit sub menus.
• Push the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the submenus.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — MENU
Button
2 — Right Arrow
Button
3 — Down Arrow
Button
4 — Compass
Button
When the appropriate conditions exist, the
instrument cluster will display the following
messages:
• Low Tire Pressure
• Low Fuel
• Service TPM System (refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System" in "Safety" for
further information)
• Damaged Key
68
• Key in Ignition
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning
chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a
single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a
single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a
single chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a
single chime)
• Key Fob Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle Not
in Park — automatic transmission
• Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle in
Motion — manual transmission
• Door Open (with vehicle graphic showing
which door is open. A single chime sounds
if the vehicle is in motion).
• Gate Open (with vehicle graphic showing
the Liftgate/back door open and a single
chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion)
• Check Gascap (refer to “Refueling The
Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information)
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instrument cluster display for approximately
10 seconds after a single chime has sounded
to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you turn the ignition switch
to the ON position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not start the engine.
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered
as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after starting
your vehicle, refer to the respective system
warning lamp for further information.
Red Telltale Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either
not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is
cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
69
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “JumpStarting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking
brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder
reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by
70
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in
either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have
service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair
is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the
A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches "H," this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass "H." In this case, a continuous chime
will sound until the engine is allowed to cool
or the 4 minute duration is expired, whichever comes first.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is
safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on
with the vehicle under power, your vehicle
will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is under power, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced
performance, and your vehicle may require
towing. The light will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check. During the
bulb check, if the driver's or passenger seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After
the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Telltale Lights
— Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.8 gal (10.6 L), this light will turn on and a
single chime will sound.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator
Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the brake warning light is not on.
72
If the ABS light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If
the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Malfunction Warning Light
The vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors emissions control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position
before vehicle start up. If the bulb does not
come on when placing the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after vehicle start. The vehicle
should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
When the vehicle is running, the MIL may
flash to alert serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe
catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this
occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also
could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message
is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in
sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go
out when the engine is running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
74
detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
— Front Axle Lock Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Indicates when the front axle lock has been
activated.
— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — If
Equipped
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the
“ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
This light indicates when the rear axle lock
has been activated.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be
ON, even if it was turned off previously.
Equipped
• The ESC system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is active. This is
normal; the sounds will stop when ESC
becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
This telltale indicates that an ESC event is
active.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
— 4WD Indicator Light — If
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
— Sway Bar Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
sway bar is disconnected.
Green Telltale Lights
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The left or right arrow will flash with the
corresponding exterior turn signal lights
when the turn signal lever is operated. A
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on.
NOTE:
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate,
check for a defective outside light bulb.
White Telltale Lights
— Cruise Indicator
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed
is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
Blue Telltale Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction
control lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low
beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
75
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to diagnose or
service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal information.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
76
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia” in your Owner's Manual
at www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel filler cap is
possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed
in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
"clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the
message off. If the problem persists, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
SAFETY
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .78
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . .78
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . .79
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .87
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .87
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Important Safety Precautions . . . . .
Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .94
. .95
. .95
.103
.110
.123
SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . .123
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . .125
77
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each
time the vehicle is started and driven. During
this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to
run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
78
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed
or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may
lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
WARNING!
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM
tires. Modification may result in degraded
ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
will turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the “Brake System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,
the brake system should be serviced as soon
as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM).
These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent
Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear
axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the
rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the brake system is not functioning properly
and that immediate service is required. If the
“Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
79
SAFETY
WARNING!
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before
this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in
order for HSA to activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
80
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle
uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill
is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is
in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate
if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is
pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of
WARNING!
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting using your
instrument cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more
than one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate control four times within 20 seconds. The
“ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and
then back to ON. If the sequence was
completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return
this feature to its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel
spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel
spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake
pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. The ESC corrects for over/under
steering of the vehicle by applying the brake
of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster), starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent accidents re-
81
SAFETY
WARNING!
sulting from loss of vehicle control due
to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel
size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
82
The ESC system has three available operating
modes in 4H range. The system has one
operating mode in 4L range. Two-wheel drive
vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles in 2H
range have two operating modes.
4H Range (4WD Models)
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in
4H range.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch to the "ESC Partial Off" mode by
pushing the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the
"ESC Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC
back on by momentarily pushing the ESC
OFF switch. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing
the ESC OFF switch. When in "ESC Partial
Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESC (except for
the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the "ESC Off
Indicator Light" will be illuminated.
This mode is intended to be used if the
vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would
normally allow is required to gain traction. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
WARNING!
• When in "ESC Partial Off" mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in "ESC Partial Off" mode,
the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the "ESC
Partial Off" mode.
ESC Full Off
This mode is entered by pushing and holding
the ESC OFF switch for five seconds.
In the "ESC Full Off" mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability.
“ESC Full Off” mode is intended for offhighway or off-road use only.
When in "ESC Full Off" mode, ESC and TCS,
except for the Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) feature described in the TCS section,
are turned off until the vehicle reaches an
approximate speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). For
speeds at or exceeding approximately
40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC goes into "ESC
Partial Off". When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system
goes back to "ESC Full Off". To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
switch. This will restore normal “ESC On”
mode of operation. The "ESC Off Indicator
Light” will always be illuminated when ESC is
in "ESC Partial Off" and "ESC full Off".
WARNING!
With the ESC in "ESC Full Off" mode, the
engine torque reduction and stability features offered by ESC and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC and ERM systems will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. The "ESC
Full Off" mode is intended for off-road use
only.
4L Range (4WD Models)
ESC Full Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in
4L range. Whenever the vehicle is started in
4L range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L
range, the ESC system will be in this mode. In
4L range, ESC and TCS, except for the Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) feature described
in the TCS section, are turned off until the
vehicle reaches an approximate speed of
40 mph (64 km/h). For speeds at or exceeding approximately 40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC
goes into "ESC Partial Off" When the vehicle
speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h), the
ESC system goes back to "ESC Full Off". The
ESC is in "ESC Full Off" at low vehicle speeds
in 4L range so that it will not interfere with
off-road driving, but the ESC function returns
to provide the stability feature at speeds
above 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will always be illuminated in
4L range when ESC is in "ESC Full Off" or
"ESC Partial Off".
ESC OFF Switch
83
SAFETY
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed in the PARK position from
any other position, and then moved out of the
PARK position. This will occur even if the
message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
With the ESC in "ESC Full Off" mode, the
engine torque reduction and stability features offered by ESC and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC and ERM systems will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. The "ESC
Full Off" mode is intended for off-road use
only.
2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD Models
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in
2H range and on 2WD vehicles.
84
ESC Partial Off
When in "ESC Partial Off" mode, the TCS
portion of ESC (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator
Light" will be illuminated.
This mode is intended to be used if the
vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would
normally allow is required to gain traction. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal
"ESC On" mode of operation.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch to the "ESC Partial Off" mode by
pushing the "ESC Full Off" switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the
"ESC Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC
back on by momentarily pushing the "ESC
Full Off" switch. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
The ESC will restore to normal ESC On mode
after each key on.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the "Partial
Off" mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The
“ESC
Activation/
Malfunction
Indicator
Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when
the ignition is turned to the
ON mode. It should go out
with the engine running. If
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the
ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is active. This is
normal; the sounds will stop when ESC
becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” indicates the customer has elected to have
the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.
When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a
complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
85
SAFETY
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities
of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take
the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the
sway. TSC will become active automatically
once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
86
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road
driving. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills in off-road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary.
The symbol indicates the
status of the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature.
The lamp will be on solid
when HDC is armed. HDC
can only be armed when
the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed
is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and
activates when the vehicle is descending a
hill. HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver
to suit the driving conditions. The speed
corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
Gear
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
DRIVE
REVERSE
However, the driver can override HDC operation by applying the brake to slow the vehicle
down below the HDC control speed. If more
speed is desired during HDC control, the
accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed
in the usual manner. When either the brake or
the accelerator is released, HDC will control
the vehicle at the original set speed.
Enabling HDC
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW
range. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
2. Push the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill
Descent Control Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will turn on solid.
Approximate HDC Set Speed
1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2.5 mph (4 km/h)
4 mph (6.5 km/h)
5.5 mph (9 km/h)
7.5 mph (12 km/h)
1 mph (1.5 km/h)
NOTE:
• If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW
range, the “Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for five seconds and
HDC will not be enabled.
• If the ESC senses that the brakes are
overheating the “Hill Descent Control
Indicator Light” will flash for five seconds and HDC will become deactivated
until the brakes have cooled.
Disabling HDC
Push the “Hill Descent” button or shift the
transfer case out of 4WD LOW range. The
“Hill Descent Control Indicator” light in the
instrument cluster will turn off.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold
placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by about 1 psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle
has not been driven for more than three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
87
SAFETY
after a three-hour period. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing and Maintenance” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven; this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition
exists, and will not turn off until the tire
pressure is at or above recommended cold
placard pressure. Once the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned OFF.
88
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) air pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately
26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warnings have
been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
CAUTION!
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership
to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure, always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, nor to
provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.”
• Receiver Module
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in
the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped
with a matching full size spare wheel and tire
assembly. The matching full size spare tire
can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound while stowed in
the spare location.
89
SAFETY
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW
TIRE PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on
your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically
update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and will
remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system
90
fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault
condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur by any of the following scenarios:
Tire location will be displayed as follows:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same
Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
Lr = Left rear
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave
signals.
NOTE:
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPM sensors.
Vehicles not equipped with instrument cluster display will inform the driver which tire(s)
are low but not provide actual tire pressure.
The low tire ISO telltale will illuminate along
with “LoTIrE” message displayed in the ODO
and then it will scroll to which tire location is
lower than the Placard Value.
LF = Left Front
rF = right Front
rr = right rear
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when
swapped with a low pressure road tire. In
the event that the matching full-size spare
tire is swapped with a low pressure road
tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be ON, and a chime to
sound. Driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will
turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” as long as none of the road
tires are below the low pressure warning
threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a
matching full-size spare wheel and tire
assembly, it does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The
TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime
will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. For each subsequent ignition key
cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. Once you repair or replace
the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important, for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in
the spare wheel, if the vehicle is equipped
with a matching full-size spare wheel and tire
assembly. The matching full-size spare tire
can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
91
SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated,
when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“LOW TIRE” message for a minimum of five
seconds. A graphic display of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) highlighted or in
a different color will also be displayed. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure
units in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
92
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the
four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is
highlighted or shown in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure inflation value. The system
will automatically update, the graphic display of
the pressure value(s) will no longer be highlighted or shown in a different color and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have
been received.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. The instrument cluster will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minimum of five seconds. This message is
then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating
which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is
not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A
system fault can occur by any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same
Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when
swapped with a low pressure road tire. In
the event that the matching full-size spare
tire is swapped with a low pressure road
tire, the next ignition switch cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be ON, a chime to sound, a
“LOW TIRE” message to appear in the
instrument cluster, and the graphic display will still show the low tire pressure
value highlighted or shown in a different
color. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn
OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” as long as none of road tires are
below the low pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a
matching full-size spare wheel and tire
assembly, it does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The
TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will remain ON, a chime will sound, and
the instrument cluster will still display a
highlighted or different color pressure
value in the graphic display. After driving
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value. For each subsequent
ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original
road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
update automatically.
In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic
in the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
93
SAFETY
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)
with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light"
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
94
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
"TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will no longer be displayed as long
as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information
in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and
your passengers as safe as possible.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”
in this section for further information).
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in a vehicle with a
rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children
who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a
collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst
injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in
a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
95
SAFETY
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
96
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed
until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt
while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It
is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING!
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat
belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
•
•
•
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
•
Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a
crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
WARNING!
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
97
SAFETY
WARNING!
WARNING!
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop,
you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your
seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A
seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
98
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor
Lockout
This feature is designed to lock the retractor
whenever the rear seatback is not fully
latched. This prevents someone from wearing
the rear center lap/shoulder belt when the
rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE:
If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be
pulled out, check that the rear seatback is
fully latched. If the rear seatback is properly
latched and the rear center lap/shoulder belt
still cannot be pulled out, the AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) system may be activated. To reset this feature you must let all of
the seat belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to pull out more
webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is
equipped with a lock-out feature to ensure
that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and
locked and the rear center lap/shoulder
belt can be pulled out of the retractor,
immediately take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for service. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat
belt is no longer twisted.
99
SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from
your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in
a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
100
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should
be used only if the existing seat belt is not
long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is
not required for a different occupant, it must
be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly
fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT
USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front
edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle
and the center of the occupant’s body is
LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use
the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt
WARNING!
is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the
arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used
to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
101
SAFETY
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (Two-Door Models)
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far
enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the
ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in
a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (Four-Door Models)
102
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
WARNING!
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly
when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing
the seat belt or children who are using
booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system
even if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
103
SAFETY
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected
that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on during the four to eight seconds when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on
after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also
be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
104
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/
shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air
Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact
Bolster
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
WARNING!
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle
switch that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver
and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
WARNING!
are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to
the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or
other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in
less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cushions
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
105
SAFETY
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air
bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
106
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
The SABs (if equipped with SABs) may help
to reduce the risk of occupant injury during
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts
and body structure.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm
lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) — If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
Location
Your vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
that are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into
the outboard side of the seats.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam
into the space between the occupant and the
door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
SABs (if equipped with SABs) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether
the deployment of the SAB in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors
aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the SAB on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require SAB
occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABs
deploy independently: a left side impact deploys
the left SAB only and a right side impact deploys
the right side SAB only. Vehicle damage by itself
is not a good indicator of whether or not SABs
should have deployed.
The SABs (if equipped with SABs) will not
deploy in all side collisions, including some
collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment.
SABs (if equipped with SABs) are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. SABs
deploy in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to the Side Air
Bags can be seriously injured or killed.
Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air
bags inflate, even if they are in an infant
or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best
protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
WARNING!
pants must wear their seat belts properly
and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster
seat that is appropriate for the size of the
child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to
be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your
seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
107
SAFETY
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in
all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
108
If you do have a collision which deploys the
air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates
the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of
the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power or until the hazard light button is
pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain
on as long as the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air
bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim
cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle
that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion,
WARNING!
needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities,
contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
109
SAFETY
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
110
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and
every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for
ignoring it.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the
child almost large enough for an adult safety
belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow
all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should
also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant
on your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm
call: 1–888–327–4236
to
or
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be
used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in
the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
who have not reached the height or weight limRestraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
its of their child restraint
the vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivehave out-grown the height or weight limit of
point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
their rear-facing child restraint
of the vehicle
Children who have out-grown their forwardBelt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
facing child restraint, but are too small to propseat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
vehicle
booster seat
height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier
but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
111
SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If
the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
112
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could
come loose in a collision. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can
loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from
the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use
this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt
fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Only
+ Top Tether Anchor
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
113
SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
114
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating
positions may have a top tether anchorage
but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
— Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
— Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
attach the child restraint?
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
115
SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
child restraint.
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
No
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
restraint?
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position. The inner anCan a child seat be installed in the center position using
Yes
chorages are 19 inches (484 mm) apart. Do not install
the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center
position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
No
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
lower LATCH anchorage?
child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows conYes
front passenger seat?
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
No — Four Door
Can the head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models — All
Yes — Two Door
116
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are
just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel
them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Four-Door Models)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchors
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to
the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
117
SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH: Two Door
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating
position. Do not use the center lower
LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in
the center of the back seat.
Center Seat LATCH: Four Door
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child
seats in the outboard positions. Please
118
WARNING!
refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline
the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat
belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints.
An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed. Follow the
WARNING!
WARNING!
child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to
the vehicle.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR
will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the
“Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
119
SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations (Four-Door Models)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations (Two-Door Models)
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
Weight limit of the Child
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recomRestraint
belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
Yes
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
front passenger seat?
also allows contact.
No — Four Door
Can the head restraints be removed?
All — Two Door
Yes — Two Door
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
No
against the belt path of the child restraint?
an ALR retractor.
120
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to
pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rearfacing car seat to any location in front of
the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
121
SAFETY
WARNING!
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to
find the tether anchorage. You may need
to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
122
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split
rear seat, make sure the tether strap
does not slip into the opening between
the seatbacks as you remove slack in the
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could
harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make
you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
• If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure
that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at
high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower
at high speed.
123
SAFETY
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
124
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding
seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on high
speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster
is inoperable.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor
mat that is securely attached using the floor
mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position
and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
WARNING!
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
your floor
• ALWAYS securely attach
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor
mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat
that cannot be properly attached and
secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for
interference. If your floor mat interferes
with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall
or slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and could cause
a loss of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the
floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor
mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle
WARNING!
carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then reinstall the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat
has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,
nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the
tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare)
for proper cold inflation pressure.
125
SAFETY
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or
if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
126
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . .128
Manual Transmission — If Equipped . .128
Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . .129
After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . .130
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Reverse Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . .135
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission —
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.135
If
.135
.136
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
(COMMAND-TRAC I OR
ROCK-TRAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Operating Instructions/Precautions .
Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . .
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped .
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.137
.138
.139
.140
. .140
. .141
SPEED CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . .142
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
To
To
To
To
To
Set A Desired Speed . .
Vary The Speed Setting .
Accelerate For Passing .
Resume Speed . . . . .
Deactivate . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.143
.143
.144
.144
.144
REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . .144
Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . .145
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . .146
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . .148
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
127
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Normal Starting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch
pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle
is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
128
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless
of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed
to the floor. This feature enhances off-road
performance by allowing the vehicle to start
when in 4L without having to press the clutch
pedal. The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted
into this mode.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the
PARK position (vehicle can also be started in
NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting
to any driving range.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, cycle
the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric
engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle.
This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your
vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can
be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Without Tip Start — Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme
Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank the engine for more than 15 seconds
at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before
trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to
run, but not have enough power to continue
running when the key is released. If this
occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.
Release the accelerator pedal and the key
once the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two
15-second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures.
With Tip Start — Automatic Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme
Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded.
To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter
engages. The starter motor will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
129
STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
NOTE:
The idle speed is controlled automatically,
and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
• When the parking brake is applied and the
automatic transmission is placed in gear,
the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will
sound to alert the driver. Fully release the
parking brake before attempting to move
the vehicle.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in
PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE
or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the
center console. To apply the parking brake,
pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To
release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower
the lever completely.
130
• This light only shows that the parking
brake is applied. It does not show the
degree of brake application.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning
Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake
when leaving your vehicle or it may roll
and cause damage or injury. Also, be
certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave
the vehicle unattended without having the
parking brake fully applied. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
131
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.
Shifting
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in
recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When
heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
You should always use first gear when starting
from a standing position.
Shift Pattern
Engine
3.6L
Speeds
Accel.
Cruise
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are
for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L
would be significantly less.
132
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
15 (24)
24 (39)
34 (55)
10 (16)
19 (31)
27 (43)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the
right time provides better acceleration when you
desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively.
Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the
engine and clutch.
4 to 5
47 (76)
37 (60)
5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into
lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can
damage the engine and clutch systems,
Any attempt to shift into lower gear with
clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into
lower gear and releasing the clutch may
result in engine damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful
to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can
cause engine damage, and/or clutch
Gear Selection
Maximum Speed
6 to 5
80 (129)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are
for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L
would be significantly less.
damage, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed. If transfer case is in low range
the vehicle speeds to cause engine and
clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with
clutch pedal depressed could result in
clutch damage.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
5 to 4
4 to 3
70 (113)
50 (81)
Reverse Shifting
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop. Press the clutch and pause
briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating.
Beginning from the NEUTRAL position, move
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine to overspeed and/or damage the
clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
3 to 2
30 (48)
2 to 1
15 (24)
the gear selector in one quick, smooth motion
straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter
passes the “knock-over”). Complete the shift by
pulling the gear selector into REVERSE.
133
STARTING AND OPERATING
The “knock-over” provides a resistance to the
driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that
they are about to shift the transmission into
REVERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to
REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift
effort.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
134
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle always
come to a complete stop, then apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and
remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the ignition key from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
WARNING!
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near
the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children). A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition
Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be
turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF
position, and once removed the transmission
is locked in PARK.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
the key in the ignition to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can
be started and stopped but the key cannot be
removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must
be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be
pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the
transmission gear range. You must press the
brake pedal to move the gear selector out of
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive,
move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and
the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your
foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made
using the Autostick shift control (refer to
"AutoStick" in this section). Moving the gear
135
STARTING AND OPERATING
selector to the left or right (-/+) while in the
DRIVE position will manually select the
transmission gear and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
Gear Selector
Autostick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
136
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the five available
gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap the
gear selector to the right or left (+/-) while in
the DRIVE position. Tapping (-) to enter
AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current
gear. When AutoStick is active, the current
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will
shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an engine lugging
or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine
over-speed.
• Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will
generate an automatic downshift (for improved acceleration) when reasonable.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current
gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in second gear. Starting out
in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift
at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick
is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
NOTE:
When the transfer case is in the 4L (Low)
range, the transmission will shift automatically (but no higher than the displayed gear).
To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the gear
selector to the right (+) until "D" is once again
displayed in the instrument cluster. You can
shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION (COMMANDTRAC I OR ROCK-TRAC)
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control.
You could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
Operating Instructions/Precautions
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
• 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case is intended to be driven in
the 2H position for normal street and highway
conditions, such as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions
can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended for
normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
137
STARTING AND OPERATING
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for further information
on shifting into 4H or 4L.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.
Shift Positions
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front
and rear driveshafts are locked together. The
light will illuminate when the transfer case is
shifted into the 4H position.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
2H Position
NOTE:
Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is
not equipped with a synchronizer, and the
front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
equal for a shift to take place. Shifting while
the front or rear wheels are spinning at different speeds can cause damage to the transfer
case.
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain, and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be approximately three times
(four times for Rubicon models) that of the
2H or 4H positions at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine.
138
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see
the information below:
WARNING!
Four-Wheel Drive Shift Pattern
This range is used for normal street and
highway driving on hard-surfaced roads.
4H Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range (4H)
provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces and should not be used on
dry pavement.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
N (Neutral) Position
This range disengages the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. It is to be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
4L Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range (4L)
provides additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION!
Exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h) while the
transfer case is engaged in 4L may result
in an engine overspeed condition and engine damage.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into the 4L position.
NOTE:
When in 4L, the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will display in the instrument cluster.
Shifting Procedures
2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made
with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force when
shifting the transfer case lever.
4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the transfer case in N
(Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not
being properly aligned. Several attempts may
be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to
engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
139
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage or
loss of power and vehicle control. You could
have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle
unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
rear wheel off the ground. The vehicle may
drive through the rear wheel remaining on
the ground and cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant
driving force to both rear wheels and reduces
wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at
one driving wheel. If traction differs between
the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by
providing more torque to the wheel that has
traction.
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the
instrument panel (to the left of the steering
column).
• Vehicle speed should
(16 km/h) or less.
be
10
mph
To activate the system, push the bottom of
the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear
axle only (the “Rear Axle Lock Indicator
Light” will illuminate), push the bottom of
the switch again to lock the front axle (the
“Front Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate). When the rear axle is locked, pushing
the bottom of switch again will lock or unlock
the front axle.
To unlock the axles, push the top of the AXLE
LOCK switch.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
WARNING!
140
• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles
are fully locked or unlocked.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery
driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the
accelerator will supply maximum traction.
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential, never run the engine with one
This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:
Axle Lock Switch
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This
system allows greater front suspension travel
in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR
switch located on the instrument panel (to
the left of the steering column).
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the
system. Push the switch again to deactivate
the system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light”
(located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The
“Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash during
activation transition, or when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar
should remain in on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
WARNING!
Sway Bar Switch
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive
on hardsurfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h); you may lose control of
the vehicle, which could result in serious
injury. The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintaining control of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to
reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over
18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.”
Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to return to off-road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR
switch to obtain the off-road position. Refer
to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further information. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order
for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/
reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require
that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or
rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY
BAR switch again.
141
STARTING AND OPERATING
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash in the instrument cluster
and vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do
not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than
18 mph (29 km/ h) may cause loss of
control of the vehicle, which could result
in serious injury. Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance.
WARNING!
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Push
Push
Push
Push
CANCEL
ON/OFF
RES +/Accel
SET - /Decel
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down
142
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed.
Each subsequent tap of the button results
in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
143
STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES (+) button and release. Resume can be
used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the
Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from
memory.
144
Using Speed Control On Hills
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed
up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's
side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost
or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is
the correct one for this vehicle.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain
may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Fuel Filler Cap
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may
cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped
into a portable container that is inside of
a vehicle. You could be burned. Always
place gas containers on the ground while
filling.
fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due
to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do
not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission
control system could result from using
an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler
cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or
damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in
the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap
until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn
the message off. If the problem persists, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap
is tightened every time the vehicle is
refueled.
145
STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
3.6L/Manual
3.21
3.6L/Manual
3.73
3.6L/Automatic
3.21
3.6L/Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Manual
3.21
3.6L/Manual
3.73
3.6L/Automatic
3.21
3.6L/Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Manual
4.10
3.6L/Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Automatic
4.10
146
Model
Two–Door Sport
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Sport
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Sport
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Sport
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Sahara
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Sahara
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Sahara
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Sahara
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Rubicon
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Rubicon
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Rubicon
Model (4WD)
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
6,900 lbs
(3 130 kg)
8,400 lbs
(3 810 kg)
6,900 lbs
(3 130 kg)
8,400 lbs
(3 810 kg)
7,000 lbs
(3 175 kg)
8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg)
7,000 lbs
(3 175 kg)
8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg)
8,600 lbs
(3 900 kg)
8,600 lbs
(3 900 kg)
8,600 lbs
(3 900 kg)
Frontal Area
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
3.6L/Manual
3.21
3.6L/Manual
3.73
3.6L/Automatic
3.21
3.6L/Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Manual
3.21
3.6L/Manual
3.73
3.6L/Automatic
3.21
3.6L/Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Manual
4.10
3.6L/Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Automatic
4.10
GCWR (Gross ComFrontal Area
bined Wt. Rating)
Four–Door Sport
7,400 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(3 357 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Sport
8,900 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(4 037 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Sport
7,400 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(3 357 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Sport
8,900 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(4 037 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Sahara
7,500 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(3 402 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Sahara
9,000 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(4 082 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Sahara
7,500 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(3 402 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Sahara
9,000 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(4 082 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Rubicon
9,200 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(4 173 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Rubicon
9,200 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(4 173 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Four–Door Rubicon
9,200 lbs
32 sq ft
Model (4WD)
(4 173 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Model
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
147
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR
should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” in the Owner’s information for further details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Front
Rear
ALL
•
•
•
•
Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N).
Tow in forward direction.
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
• For RHD models, refer to the Postal Supplement for Recreational Towing instructions.
148
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N), automatic transmission must be in
PARK, and manual transmission must be in
gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational
towing.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle.
Towing with only one set of wheels on the
ground (front or rear) will cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a
vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be
placed in PARK for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in
gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper
face bar will be damaged.
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain, and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing
to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL or depress the clutch pedal on
a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
149
STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal
on manual transmissions) for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual
transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine OFF.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or
place manual transmission in gear (NOT
in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the transmission is shifted into PARK with
CAUTION!
the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the
engine running. With the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF before shifting the transmission into
PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle
using a suitable tow bar.
6. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of
NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain
OFF to avoid gear clash.
14. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, or place manual transmission in
NEUTRAL.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)
8. Release the brake pedal.
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
9. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
11. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
150
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
10. Start the engine.
12. Release the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into gear, release
the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
manual transmissions), and check that
the vehicle operates normally.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . .152
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . .156
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Preparations For Jump Start. . . . . . . .163
Jump Starting Procedure. . . . . . . . . .164
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . .165
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . .166
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . .167
Four–Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . .168
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .169
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS). . . . . . . . . . . . .169
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Without The Ignition Key. . . . . . . . . .168
Jack/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . .160
151
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on
the Hazard Warning flasher.
When the switch is activated, all directional turn
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp
Heater Control Lamps (2)
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/
Wipe)
Soundbar Dome Lamp
** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.
152
Bulb Number
658
194
**
912
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
H13
LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
3157NA
168
PSX24W
3157
LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
3157
194
Headlamps (2)
Premium Head Lamps
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2)
Front Side Marker Lamps (2)
Fog Lamps
Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Backup Lamps (2)
License Lamp
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement
Headlamp
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate
the clearing process.
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers
along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting
at one side and working toward the other.
4. Turn both park and turn signal socket
assemblies 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
remove.
5. Remove the four screws holding the metal
retaining ring.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn
counterclockwise.
153
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
Front Park/Turn Signal
Front Fog Lamp
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock
position.
1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers
along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and remove.
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the
back of the front fog lamp.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and
push the connector locking tab to the
lock position.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb
1/4 turn clockwise.
154
2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting
at one side and working toward the other.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector
from the front fog lamp connector
receptacle.
3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove from housing.
Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
replace.
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch
features and squeeze them together to
unlock the bulb from the back of the front
fog lamp housing.
Front Side Marker
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
opening in the housing and then connect
the replacement bulb.
1. Reach under the front fender flare and
locate the front side marker socket.
2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1/3 turn and remove it from the
housing. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket to replace.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamp
1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching
the tail light housing to the body. DO NOT
REMOVE THE OUTBOARD SCREWS AT ANY
TIME.
3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn
counterclockwise, then remove it from the
housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
replace.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that
extends upward from the tailgate behind the
spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the
LED/Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/
cover in place on the spare tire carrier.
3. Disconnect the wire harness from the
back of the LED cover.
Inboard Screw Location
2. Separate the housing from the body by
pushing the lamp inboard while pulling
the lamp away from the body.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
155
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
Totally Integrated Power Module
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the
battery. This center contains cartridge fuses,
mini fuses, and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of
the cover.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Totally Integrated Power Module
Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
156
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
–
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
–
40 Amp Green
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
–
Transfer Case Module
–
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/Stability Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/Stability Control System
–
PZEV Sec Motor/Flex Fuel – If Equipped
Cavity
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
2 Amp Grey
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve
Sway Bar
–
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
Rear Defroster
Front Blower
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans Range
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper LO/HI
Front/Rear Washer
Spare
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Switch Stop Lamp Feed
Relay Trailer Lighting (Stop lamp)
Front/Rear Axle Locker Relay
Clock Spring
Power Inverter – If Equipped
Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT)
Front Heated Seat
Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
157
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
M10
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini Fuse
15 Amp Blue
M11
M12
M13
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow
M14
M15
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
158
Description
Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment System, Satellite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD, Hands-Free Module, RADIO, Antenna,
Universal Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp
(Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System, Underhood Lamp
Amplifier
Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment Node, Wireless Control Module,
SIREN, Multifunction Control Switch
Trailer Tow (Export Only)
Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror, Cabin Compartment Node,
Transfer Case Switch, Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire Pressure
Monitor, Glow Plug Module – Export Diesel Only
Airbag Module
Left Tail/License/Park Lamp
Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2)
Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light, Switch Bank
Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)
Right Horn (HI/LOW)
Left Horn (HI/LOW)
Rear Wiper
Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only
Power Window Switch, Driver Window Switch
Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module
Powertrain Control Module
Cavity
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
M38
–
25 Amp Clear
Description
Powertrain
Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed
Backup Lamps
Airbag Controller, TT EUROPE
Powertrain Controller
Park Assist, Climate Control System, Headlamp Wash, Compass
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet
Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability Control, Stop Lamp
Switch, Fuel Pump Relay
Lock/Unlock Motors
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure
the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water
to get into the Integrated Power Module,
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in
a dangerous electrical system overload.
If a properly rated fuse continues to
blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
159
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Preparations For Jacking
WARNING!
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be
crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool
for changing tires only. The jack should
not be used to lift the vehicle for service
purposes. The vehicle should be jacked
on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and lug wrench are located in the
rear storage compartment.
NOTE:
Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise to loosen the jack from the storage bin.
160
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull
far enough off the road to avoid being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Plastic Wing Nut Location
Spare Tire Removal
To remove the spare tire from the carrier,
remove the tire cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench, turning them counterclockwise.
NOTE:
If you have added aftermarket accessories to
the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross weight of 85 lbs (38.5 kg)
including the weight of the spare tire.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, or a manual transmission into
REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear wheel.
WARNING!
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an
automatic transmission in PARK; a
manual transmission in REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is
on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a
tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must
be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those indicated.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
the stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
161
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear
of the vehicle. Place the jack under the
axle tube, as shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the
cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
Front Jack Engagement Location
162
Rear Jack Engagement Location
WARNING!
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack
screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only
until the tire just clears the surface and
enough clearance is obtained to install
the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack
screw to the left, and remove the jack.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down
on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate nuts until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for correct lug nut torque.
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel
blocks.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their
proper locations.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
JUMP STARTING
Preparations For Jump Start
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so
please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the
right rear of the engine compartment, behind
the Power Distribution Center.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.
You can be injured by moving fan blades.
163
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other
as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual
transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the
ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables reach, set the parking
brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
164
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other
or either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote
positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
CAUTION!
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
Do not run the booster vehicle engine
above 2000 rpm since it provides no
charging benefit, wastes fuel and can
damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start
your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at your authorized
dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop
the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
165
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it
off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C
off can help remove this heat.
4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN
position, but do not start the engine.
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
• You can also turn the temperature control
to maximum heat, the mode control to
floor and the blower control to high. This
allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system.
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into
the access port, and push and hold the
override release lever down.
7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
166
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the gear selector override access
cover (located to the right of the gear
selector).
Gear Selector Override Location
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position,
you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
9. Reinstall the gear selector override access
cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear the area around the front wheels.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission)
or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing
the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System”
in “Safety” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further details. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore
"ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode
and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the
wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing
a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be
towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
167
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required
to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only
tow bars and other equipment designed for
this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to
“Gear Selector Override” in this section for
168
Front
Rear
ALL
4WD MODELS
See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”.
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to
your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the
ACC or ON/RUN position, not in the
LOCK/OFF position.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle
is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing
without the ignition key is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Four–Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with
all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with
one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is
in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in
PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions).
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be
used. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front
or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,
they are mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to
use both of the front tow hooks to minimize
the risk of damage to the vehicle. Always use
an appropriately rated tow strap.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling
with tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may
cause vehicle damage.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed
under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
169
170
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . .172
DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . .185
Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . .176
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .185
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .189
ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . .177
RAISING THE VEHICLE. . . . . . . .189
3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Oil Level . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . .
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission . . .
Maintenance-Free Battery .
Air Conditioner Maintenance
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.177
.178
.178
.179
.179
.180
.182
.182
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tires — General Information . .
Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tires — If Equipped . . .
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . .
Tire Chains (Traction Devices). .
Tire Rotation Recommendations
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.189
.197
.201
.202
.203
.204
.205
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . .207
STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .207
BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Body And Underbody Maintenance . . .207
Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . .208
INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . .210
Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . .210
Leather Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
171
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster
display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
172
On non-instrument cluster display equipped
vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this guide
for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run
time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours
of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles
(6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a
dusty and off road environment or is operated
predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered
Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering
and automatic transmission, and fill as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
Maintenance Plan
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if
equipped with dipstick
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
hoses and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection
and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty
or off-road conditions
• Inspect all door latches for presence of
grease, reapply if necessary.
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary
X
X
X
X
173
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
X
Inspect transfer case fluid.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs **
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter.
174
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading,
taxi, police, delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained
high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C).
X
X
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X
X
X
X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Change front and rear axle fluid if using
your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
X
X
X
X
X
175
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not
apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
176
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.
This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Battery
Engine Oil Dipstick
Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover)
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
177
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. The engine oil level should
be checked five minutes after a warmed up
engine has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Always maintain the oil level
within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding
1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is
at the bottom of the crosshatch zone will
result in a reading at the top of the crosshatch zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase
will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure.
This could damage your engine.
178
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan
motor lead before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator
or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or
turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The
fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a
cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant
(antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser
(if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn
you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
Brake System
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer (if equipped) is
shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not
radiator antifreeze). When refilling the
washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid
and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield
washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the
temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer
fluid containers.
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal
can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have
your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should
be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced,
or immediately if the brake system warning
light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring
level within the designated marks on the side
of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should
be checked when pads are replaced. If the
brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid
179
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake
fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs
moisture from the air resulting in a lower
boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
180
Automatic Transmission
Special Additives
Selection Of Lubricant
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special
dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's
specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is important
to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder,
and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
It is best to check the fluid level when the
transmission is at normal operating temperature (approximately 180°F/82°C). This oc-
curs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature, the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the
fingertips.
Use the following procedure to check the
transmission fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Remove the engine cover by pulling it up
off the mounting studs (two in the front
and two in the rear).
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at
least 60 seconds, and leave the engine
running for the rest of this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press
the brake pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into
each gear position (allowing time for the
transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in
PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and
reinsert it until seated.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the
fluid level on both sides. The fluid level
reading is only valid if there is a solid
coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be
full of fluid if the actual level is at or above
the hole. The fluid level should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes on
the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid
through the dipstick tube to bring it to the
proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY the
specified fluid (refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" under “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications). After adding any
quantity of oil through the dipstick tube,
wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil
to fully drain into the transmission before
rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE:
• The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
if the actual level is at or above the hole.
• If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature,
the fluid level should be between the
two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80°F
(27°C). If the fluid level is correctly
established at 80° F (27°C), it should
be between the HOT (upper) reference
holes when the transmission reaches
180° F (82°C). Remember it is best to
check the level at the normal operating
temperature.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick.
Do not add fluid until the temperature is
elevated enough to produce an accurate
reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK,
to warm the fluid.
181
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
8. Reinstall the engine cover and snap it
down securely onto the four mounting
studs.
9. Check for leaks. Release the parking
brake.
NOTE:
To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing
fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is
properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick
cap to spring back slightly from its fully
seated position, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the
fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled
for any reason.
182
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenancefree battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the
battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
vehicle battery cables before connecting
the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning
of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located
in your owner’s information kit, for further
warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozonefriendly substance. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by
the Environmental Protection Agency and is
an ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement
(A/C Air Filter)
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the
cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your
eyes, resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air
inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform
the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
183
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the two air filter access doors to the
HVAC housing.
184
1 — Left Retaining Tab
2 — Right Retaining Tab
Air Filter Access Door Open
1 — Air Conditioning Filter Access
Door
2 — Air Conditioning Air Filter
5. Open the two air filter access doors.
6. Remove the two particulate air filters from
the HVAC air inlet housing. Pull the filter
elements straight out of the housing, one
at a time.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an
arrow to indicate airflow direction through
the filter. Failure to properly install the
filter will result in the need to replace it
more often.
8. Close A/C Air Filter access doors and secure retaining tabs.
9. Rotate the glove compartment door back
into position.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment
to perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result
in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost
or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
WARNING!
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road
film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following
points:
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper
arm or blade that is damaged.
185
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade
in place or the glass may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in
the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked
Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm, press the release tab on the
wiper blade and while holding the wiper
arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
186
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In
Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
Installing The Front Wipers
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until
the wiper arm is in the full up position.
1. Remove the rear wiper arm pivot cap To
access the wiper arm nut.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the
glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Assembly
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
187
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Still grasping the wiper blade, move the
wiper blade away from the wiper arm to
disengage.
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the wiper blade nearest to
wiper arm with your right hand. With your
left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull
the wiper blade away from the wiper arm
past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle
on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an
audible snap.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
188
Installing The Rear Wiper
Frequency Of Fluid Change
1. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and apply pressure to the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it
snaps into place.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the
fluid becomes contaminated with water, it
should be changed immediately. Otherwise,
change the fluid as recommended in the
Maintenance Plan. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals.
2. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap
the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Manual Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer's recommended
manual transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to your authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Fluid Level Check
Tire Safety Information
Check the fluid level by removing the fill
plug. The fluid level should be between the
bottom of the fill hole and a point not more
than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum
Load
5 — Maximum
Pressure
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and Temperature Grades
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires
have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
189
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size
molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter "P" is absent
from this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same
as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have
the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the
tire diameter molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
190
EXAMPLE:
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
191
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however, the date code may only be
on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will
have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If
the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the
tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
192
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
193
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
This placard tells you important information
about the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
194
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must
not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the
tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
195
196
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by
improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of
your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side
may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
197
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge
of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
198
Inflation pressures specified on the placard
are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to
a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking
tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F
(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for
this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat
tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid
loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the
run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while
a tire is in the run flat mode.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
199
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
• Driving style.
Replacement Tires
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
• Distance driven.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of
these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
200
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,
and gasoline.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in
the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer
with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified
for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may
change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
WARNING!
tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all
season tires. All season tires can be identified
by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet
and dry conditions, and are not intended to
be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less
than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
201
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires. Use
snow tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
202
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service
Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in your Owner’s
Manual on www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals
(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
(Canada Residents) for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited
use temporary spare installed. Damage to
the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare
tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel
found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for
the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)
soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle.
203
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other
road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They
can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning
chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
204
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or
Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, nonacidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle
and apply the brakes to remove the water
droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake
rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when
braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tireto-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• P225/75R16 or a P235/65R17 tire with
the use of a traction device that meets the
SAE type “Class S” specification is
recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could
lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that
only traction devices in good condition
are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the device before further use.
CAUTION!
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread
designs such as those on On/Off Road type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,
and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the
“rearward-cross” shown in the following
diagram.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
Tire Rotation
205
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type
and circumference on each wheel. Any
difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
206
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel,
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
WARNING!
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for
more than 21 days, you may want to take
steps to protect your battery. You may:
BODYWORK
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
• Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Integrated Power Module (Fuses) labeled
Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) and store it in a
safe location within the fuse box.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash
with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the
battery.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
207
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse
the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits
have accumulated on your vehicle, use
Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover
to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and
power buffing that may diminish the gloss
or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and
painted surfaces.
208
CAUTION!
• Use of power washers exceeding
1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in
damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if
you drive near the ocean, hose off the
undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels,
and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches
in the paint, touch them up immediately.
The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the
paint and protective coating, have your
vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure
that such materials are well packaged and
sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of
your vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's
interior trim and top, follow these precautions:
• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with
the top down, as exposure to sun or rain
may damage interior trim.
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching
agents on top material, as damage may
result.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down
and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
• After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top,
always make sure it is completely dry before lowering.
• Be especially careful when washing the
windows by following the directions for
“Care of Fabric Top Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent,
or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a
brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is
required, use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top
Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming
cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of
cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with
clean water. Remember to allow the top to dry
before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they
can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past
the weather strips.
• It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the
top, opening a door or lowering a window
while the top is wet may allow water to
drip into the vehicle's interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip
seals may cause water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the
removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into
the vehicle's interior.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special
care is taken by following these directions:
1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust.
Instead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm,
clean water, and wipe across the window,
not up and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely
clean all plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine scratches to improve
visibility and provides UV protection to
help prevent yellowing.
2. When washing, never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap. Never use
solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning
agents.
3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water,
then wipe with a soft and slightly moist,
clean cloth.
4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never
use a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use
warm water only if you must clean the
window quickly.
209
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
off-road driving will have a major impact
on zipper operation. Even normal on-road
driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation. To
maintain ease of use of the window zippers, each window zipper should be
cleaned and lubricated regularly. Use
Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation. Before applying, make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand, mud, and
other materials. Clean both sides of the
zipper, not just one side. Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to
dry. Aggressively work the Mopar Soft Top
Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper teeth. If a stuck zipper
slide is experienced, work the Mopar Soft
Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or
equivalent into the zipper slide. Several
applications may be required before the
zipper comes free.
6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or
any tape to the windows. Adhesives are
hard to remove and may damage the
windows.
210
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they
may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or
worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily
with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care
should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends
to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric
dye transfer more so than darker colors. The
leather is designed for easy cleaning, and
FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based
and/or Ketone based cleaning products to
clean leather seats, as damage to the seat
may result.
211
212
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Torque Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .214
FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . .215
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . .216
3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . .215
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . .216
MOPAR ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . .218
Authentic Accessories And Jeep
Performance Parts By Mopar . . . . . . .218
213
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears underbody, on the right side of
the frame rail near the center of the vehicle,
as well as on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number
and optional equipment.
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug
nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality
six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left
hand side of the engine block.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
1/2” x 20
19 mm
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove
any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion
or loose particles.
214
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern
until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the
lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/
bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/
bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure
to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to
meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using highquality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains
a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available, the usage
of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
215
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models
Four Door Models
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
18.6 Gallons
22.5 Gallons
70 Liters
85 Liters
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
10.5 Quarts
9.9 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
216
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming
to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
rust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for
use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene
glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Chassis
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function
or performance of your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar Manual Transmission Lubricant meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-9224.
Transfer Case
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5).
Axle Differential (Rear)
226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API
GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use Mopar Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140).
Models equipped with Trac-Lok require an additive.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
217
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Power Steering Reservoir
We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4, Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
knowing that they have passed the same
rigid standards for function, fit, durability
and performance as your Wrangler.
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories And Jeep
Performance Parts By Mopar
• Mopar Accessories and Jeep performance
parts are developed with the same engineering that went into your Wrangler.
Choose these products with confidence
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
• For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership
or online at mopar.com for U.S. residents
and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
Chrome:
• Grille
• Exhaust Tip
• Tubular Side Steps
• Fuel Door
• Tubular Bumpers
• Tail Lamp Guards
Off Road & Performance:
• Bumpers
• Winches
• Performance Axles
• Cold Air Intake
•
•
•
•
• Skid Plates
• Lights
• Tow Hooks
218
Rock Rails
Lift Kits
LED Lights
Differential Covers
Exterior:
• Black Tubular Side Steps
• Satin Black Grille
• Spare Tire Covers
• Wheel Locks
• Locking Fuel Cap
• Hood (2 Styles Of Performance Hoods)
Interior:
• Lockable Storage
• Hard Top Headliner
• Custom Premium Leather Seats
Electronics:
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System
• Mopar Web
•
•
•
•
•
Satin Fuel Door
Cab Covers
Soft & Hard Tops
Hood Decals
Ski And Bike Carriers
•
•
•
•
•
Air Deflectors
Wheels
Splash Guards
Fender Flares
Trailer Hitches
• All Weather Floor Mats
• Carpet Floor Mats
• Seat Covers
• Cargo Area Tray
• Grab Handles
• Remote Start
• Heated Washer Solvent
219
220
MULTIMEDIA
MULTIMEDIA
RADIO 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . .
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
Radio Operation . . . . . . . .
CD/DISC Operation . . . . . .
Audio Jack Operation . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.223
.223
.223
.223
.224
RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE
RADIO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . .
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
Radio Operation . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Satellite Radio . . .
CD/DISC Operation . . . . . .
Audio Jack Operation . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.226
.226
.226
.227
.227
.227
UCONNECT 430/430N . . . . . . .228
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Equalizer, Balance And Fade . . . . . . .229
.230
.231
.231
.232
.234
.234
.235
.236
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO/
TRAVEL LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
.245
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
CD/DVD Disc Operation . . . . . .
Audio Jack Operation . . . . . . . .
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation
Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio
Garmin Navigation . . . . . . . . .
Main Navigation Menu . . . . . . .
Following Your Route . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . .240
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL
INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Reception Conditions . . . . . .
Care And Maintenance . . . . .
Anti-theft Protection . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.241
.241
.241
.241
UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . . .243
Phone Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making A Phone Call . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving A Call — Accept (And End).
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing The Volume . . . . . . . . . .
.243
.244
.245
.245
.245
.245
UCONNECT VOICE COMMAND .246
Voice Command Operation. . . . . . . . .246
Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
BLUETOOTH STREAMING
AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
221
MULTIMEDIA
RADIO 130
Uconnect 130
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
222
CD Eject Button
SEEK Down Button
SEEK Up Button
AM/FM Button
DISC Mode Button
AUX Mode Button
Rewind Button
Fast Forward Button
9 — Set Clock Button
10 — Audio Settings/Rotate To Tune
11 — Radio Sales Code
12 — Audio Jack
13 — Set Preset/CD Random Play
14 — Station Presets Buttons
15 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume
NOTE:
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
• Your radio has many features that add to
the comfort and convenience for you and
your passengers.
1. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and
“BASS” will display.
• Some of these radio features should not be
used when driving because they take your
eyes from the road or your attention from
driving.
Clock Setting
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the
hours blink.
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
set the hours.
3. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until the minutes begin to blink.
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
set the minutes.
5. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save the changes.
6. Push any button/knob or wait five seconds
to exit.
2. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
select the desired setting.
3. Continue pushing the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to display and set “MID
RANGE,” “TREBLE,” “BALANCE” and
“FADE.”
Radio Operation
• A second station may be added to each
push button. Push the SET/RND or SET
(depending on the radio) button twice and
SET 2 will show in the display. Then select
a preset button (1–6).
CD/DISC Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Push to seek through CD tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
Seek Up/Down Buttons
SET/RND Or RND (Depending On Radio) Button
(Random Play)
• Push the seek up or down button to seek
through radio stations in AM or FM bands.
• Push this button while the CD is playing to
activate Random Play.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
• This feature plays the selections on the CD
in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Store Radio Presets Manually
• Tune to the desired station.
• Push the SET/RND or SET (depending on
the radio) button once and SET 1 will show
in the display. Then select a preset button
(1–6).
223
MULTIMEDIA
Audio Jack Operation
The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to
connect a portable audio device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound
system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm
stereo audio patch cable.
Pushing the AUX button will change the
mode to auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is
connected, allowing the music from your portable device to play through the vehicle's
speakers.
The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the
buttons on the radio. However, the volume
may be controlled using the radio or portable
device.
224
RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
1 — CD Eject Button
2 — SEEK Down Button
3 — SEEK Up Button
4 — Voice Command Button
5 — Uconnect Phone Button
6 — Station Info Button
7 — Rewind Button
8 — Fast Forward Button
9 — Set Clock Button
10 — Audio Settings/Rotate To Tune
11 — Radio Sales Code
Uconnect 130 With SiriusXM Satellite Radio
12 — Audio Jack
13 — Set Preset/CD Random Play
14 — Station Preset Buttons
15 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume
16 — AM/FM Mode Button
17 — List Folders On A CD
18 — Satellite Radio Button
19 — Music Type Button
20 — DISC Mode Button
21 — Set Up Function Button
225
MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• Your radio may not be equipped with the
Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect
Phone features. To determine if your radio
has these features, push the Voice Command button on the radio. You will hear a
voice prompt if you have the feature, or
see a message on the radio stating
“Uconnect Phone not available” if you do
not.
• Your radio has many features that add to
the comfort and convenience of you and
your passengers. Some of these radio features should not be used when driving
because they take your eyes from the road
or your attention from driving.
5. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save the changes.
Store Radio Presets Manually
6. Push any button/knob or wait five seconds
to exit.
• Push the SET/RND or SET (depending on
the radio) button once and SET 1 will show
in the display. Then select a preset button
(1–6).
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
1. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and
“BASS” will display.
2. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
select the desired setting.
3. Continue pushing the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to display and set “MID
RANGE,” “TREBLE,” “BALANCE” and
“FADE.”
Radio Operation
Clock Setting
Seek Up/Down Buttons
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the
hours blink.
• Push the seek up or down button to seek
through radio stations in AM, FM, or SAT
bands.
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
set the hours.
3. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until the minutes begin to blink.
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
set the minutes.
226
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
• Tune to the desired station.
• A second station may be added to each
push button. Push the SET/RND or SET
(depending on the radio) button twice and
SET 2 will show in the display. Then select
a preset button (1–6).
Music Type
NOTE:
The Music Type function only operates when
in FM mode.
• Push the MUSIC TYPE button to activate
this mode. Push the MUSIC TYPE button
again or turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to select the desired music type
(Adult Hits, Country, Jazz, Oldies, Rock,
etc.).
• When a music type is chosen and the
Music type is displayed, push either SEEK
button and the radio will only search for
stations with the selected music type.
SETUP Button
• Pushing the SETUP button allows you to
select between items that are available in
that particular mode.
• Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
scroll through the entries. Push the
AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry
and make changes.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide
to continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until
you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All
fees and programming subject to change. Our
satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA
and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also
available in PR (with coverage limitations).
Our Internet radio service is available
throughout our satellite service area and in
AK and HI. ©2017 Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio gives you over
130 channels, including 100% commercialfree music from nearly every genre, plus all
your favorite sports, news, talk and entertainment channels – all with crystal clear, coastto-coast coverage, all in one place and all at
your fingertips.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push
the SAT button on the faceplate.
CD/DISC Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Push to seek through CD tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
SET/RND or RND (Depending On Radio) Button
(Random Play)
• Push this button while the CD is playing to
activate random play.
• This feature plays the selections on the CD
in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
LIST Button
• Push the LIST button to bring up a list of
all folders on the CD. Scroll up or down the
list by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob.
• To select a folder from the list, push the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the radio
will begin playing the files contained in
that folder.
Audio Jack Operation
The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to
connect a portable audio device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound
system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm
stereo audio patch cable.
Pushing the AUX button will change the
mode to auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is
connected, allowing the music from your portable device to play through the vehicle's
speakers.
The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the buttons on the radio. However, the volume may
be controlled using the radio or portable device.
227
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 430/430N
Uconnect 430/430N
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
228
Voice Command Button
Open/Close Display
MENU Button
AUDIO Settings Button
Internal Hard Drive Button
USB Port
7 — Audio Jack
8 — Radio Sales Code
9 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume
10 — Select MEDIA Mode Button
11 — RADIO Mode Button
12 — Uconnect Phone Button
NOTE:
• Your radio may not be equipped with the
Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect
Phone features. To determine if your radio
has these features, push the Voice Command button on the radio. You will hear a
voice prompt if you have the feature, or see
a message on the radio stating “Uconnect
Phone not available” if you do not.
• Your radio has many features that add to
the comfort and convenience of you and
your passengers. Some of these radio features should not be used when driving
because they take your eyes from the road
or your attention from driving.
Clock Setting
1. Turn the radio on, then press the screen
where the time is displayed.
2. Press the “User Clock” button on the
touchscreen or the time display (Navigation radio only).
3. To adjust the hours, press either the “Hour
Forward” or “Hour Backward” button on
the touchscreen.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
Audio Control Menu
4. To adjust the minutes, press either the
“Minute Forward” or “Minute Backward”
button on the touchscreen.
5. To save the new time setting, press the
screen where the word “Save” is
displayed.
Menu
Audio Control Menu
• Push the MENU button on the faceplate to
access the System Setup menu and the
My Files menu.
• Push the AUDIO button on the faceplate
on the right side of the radio.
• Push the MENU button on the faceplate in
an active mode (SAT, CD, AUX, etc.) to
change mode specific settings.
• Use either the “arrow” buttons on the
touchscreen or the sliders to adjust BASS,
MID, and/or TREBLE.
• Press the “BAL/FADE” button on the
touchscreen and use either the “arrow”
buttons on the touchscreen or the crosshair to change Balance and Fade. The
“Center” button on the touchscreen resets
the settings.
229
MULTIMEDIA
Display Settings
• Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen to save your settings.
Radio Operation
• To access Radio Mode, push the RADIO
button on the left side of the faceplate,
then press the “AM,” “FM” or “SAT” button on the touchscreen to select the band.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the “SEEK UP” or “SEEK DOWN”
buttons on the touchscreen to seek
through radio stations in AM, FM, or SAT
bands. Hold either seek button to bypass
stations without stopping.
Display Settings
• Push the MENU button on the faceplate
and press the “Display Settings” button
on the touchscreen to access the Display
Settings menu.
• Select the “Daytime Colors” button on the
touchscreen to switch to manual daytime
mode and to adjust the brightness of the
display using daytime colors.
• Select the “Nighttime Colors” button on
the touchscreen to switch to manual
nighttime mode and to adjust the brightness of the display using nighttime colors.
• Select the “Auto Color Mode” button on
the touchscreen to switch to automatic
daytime/nighttime mode and to control
the brightness of the display using the
dimmer switch of the vehicle.
230
Store Radio Presets Manually
Radio Operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Radio Tuner Tabs
Individual Presets
Search/Browse
Radio Station/Track Info
Sort Presets
Station Scan
Seek Down
Direct Tune
Seek Up
• Select the radio band by pressing either
the “AM,” “FM,” or “SAT” button on the
touchscreen.
• Find the station to store by either pressing
the “SEEK UP” or “SEEK DOWN” buttons
on the touchscreen, pressing the “Scan”
button on the touchscreen, or by using the
“Direct Tune” button on the touchscreen.
• Once the desired station is found, press
and hold one of the “PRESETS” buttons
on the touchscreen in the list to the right,
until the preset key flashes and the station
text on the button on the touchscreen
changes.
NOTE:
If the Presets are not visible on the right side
of the screen, press the “PRESETS” button
on the touchscreen.
CD/DVD Disc Operation
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate
to display the media source tabs at the top
of the screen. Select the source by pressing the “HDD,” “DISC” or “AUX” media
source button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Your Touchscreen Radio will usually automatically switch to the appropriate mode
when something is first connected or inserted
into the system.
Insert A CD/DVD Disc
• To insert a disc, push the LOAD button on
the faceplate.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CD/DVD Disc Operation
Media Source Tabs
Folder/Track
Open Folder
Track Information
Sort Tracks
Track Scan
Seek Down
Play/Pause
Seek Up
• With the printed side upwards, insert the
disc into the disc slot of the radio. The
radio pulls the disc in automatically and
closes the flip screen. The radio selects
the appropriate mode after the disc is
recognized, and starts playing the first
track. The display shows “Reading...” during this process.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Push the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN buttons on the faceplate to seek through
tracks in Disc Mode. Holding the SEEK UP
button on the touchscreen will fast forward
through the track until the beginning of
the track is reached; if still held it will
fast-forward through the next sequential
track(s) (if random play mode is not active)
until released. Holding the SEEK DOWN
button on the touchscreen will fast-reverse
through the track until the beginning of
the track is reached; if still held it will
fast-reverse through the next sequential
track(s) (if random play mode is not active)
until released.
Audio Jack Operation
The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to
connect a portable audio device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound
system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm
stereo audio patch cable.
231
MULTIMEDIA
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate
then the “AUX” button on the touchscreen
to change the mode to auxiliary device if
the Audio Jack is connected, allowing the
music from your portable device to play
through the vehicle's speakers.
• Before using the HDD mode, you will need
to copy songs and pictures to the internal
hard drive. Songs and pictures can be
added to the hard drive by using a CD or
USB device (e.g. thumb drive or memory
stick).
NOTE:
The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device itself, not the buttons
on the radio. However, the volume may be
controlled using the radio or portable device.
NOTE:
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation
• The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) mode gives you
access to the audio files on the internal
hard disk drive. It functions similar to a CD
player, with the exception that the internal
HDD can hold more tracks.
• It is also possible to import display pictures to the internal hard disk drive. The
pictures can be displayed on the right half
of the radio screen.
232
Copying Music From CD
• HDD supports only .jpg/JPEG formats for
photos.
• WMA/MP3 Files and selective songs from
a CD can also be added to the HDD. See
the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for more information.
NOTE:
Copying Music From CD
• The copy progress is shown in the lower
left corner of the screen.
• Push the LOAD button on the faceplate.
• Insert a disc, then push the MY FILES
button on the faceplate. Select the “MY
MUSIC” button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Add Music Files to HDD” button on the touchscreen, then press the
“Disc” button on the touchscreen in the
next screen to start the process.
• You might need to select the folder or title
depending on the CD, then push “DONE”
to start the copy process.
Copying Music From USB
• The USB port on the radio face plate
allows you to copy files to your hard drive.
To access, lift up on the cover.
• Insert a USB device (e.g. thumb drive or
memory stick), then select the “MY MUSIC” button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Add Music Files to HDD” button on the touchscreen, then press the
“Front USB” button on the touchscreen in
the next screen.
Copying Pictures To The HDD
• Insert either a CD or a USB device containing your pictures in JPEG format.
• Push the MY FILES button on the faceplate.
• Press the “My Pictures” button on the
touchscreen to get an overview of the currently stored images, then press the “Add”
button on the touchscreen.
Copying Music From USB
• Select the folders or titles you would like
to copy, then press the “SAVE” button on
the touchscreen to start the copy process.
• To copy all of the titles, press the “ALL”
button on the touchscreen then press the
“SAVE” button on the touchscreen.
Copying Pictures To The HDD
• Press the “Disc” or “USB” button on the
touchscreen, then select the folders or
pictures you wish to copy to the HDD. Use
the “PAGE” buttons on the touchscreen to
page through the list of pictures.
NOTE:
The copy progress is shown in the lower left
corner of the screen.
• Press the desired pictures or press the “All”
button on the touchscreen for all pictures.
Confirm your selections by pressing the
“SAVE” button on the touchscreen.
• Once the import is complete, the pictures
will then be available in the “MY PICTURES” screen.
Display A Picture On The Radio Screen
NOTE:
The copy progress is shown in the lower left
corner of the screen.
233
MULTIMEDIA
• Push the MY FILES button on the faceplate, then press the “My Pictures” button
on the touchscreen. Press the desired picture, press the “Set as Picture View” button on the touchscreen and then press the
“Exit” button on the touchscreen. Lastly
push the MENU button on the faceplate
and press the “Picture View” button on the
touchscreen to display the chosen picture
on the radio screen.
CAUTION!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen. Use a clean
and dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth to
clean the touchscreen.
Garmin Navigation
Playing Music From The HDD
NOTE:
• A check mark in the My Pictures screen
indicates the currently used picture.
• Press the “NAV” button in the upper right
corner of the touchscreen to access the
Navigation system.
• You can also delete pictures by pressing
the “Delete” button on the touchscreen.
Playing Music From The HDD
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate
to display the media source tabs at the top
of the screen. Press the “HDD” button on
the touchscreen. Press the desired track
button on the touchscreen to play or press
the “SEARCH/BROWSE” button on the
touchscreen to search by artist, by album,
by song, by genre, from a folder, or from
Favorites.
234
• Uconnect 430N integrates Garmin’s
consumer-friendly navigation into your vehicle. Garmin Navigation includes a database with over six million points of interest.
Browsing Music From The HDD
Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio
• If necessary, use a dry micro fiber lens
cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning
solution such as isopropyl alcohol or an
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio
of 50:50. Always follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions.
Garmin Navigation
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
Entering A Destination Address
1. Program a destination.
• From the main navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Address” button on the
touchscreen.
2. While traveling on your route, press the
upper left area of the map screen where
your next turn is displayed.
3. The navigation system will then repeat the
distance to your next turn.
4. While the navigation system is speaking,
use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to
adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
Please note the volume setting for Navigation Voice Prompt is different than the
audio system.
NOTE:
For your own safety and the safety of others, it
is not possible to use certain features while
the vehicle is in motion.
Main Navigation Menu
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button
on the touchscreen.
Main Navigation Menu
• Select a category, then a subcategory, if
necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “Go”
button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the main navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen.
Next, press the “Points of Interest” button
on the touchscreen then press the “Spell
Name” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Go”
button on the touchscreen.
• Follow the on-screen prompts to enter the
address, then press the “Go” button on
the touchscreen.
Setting Your Home Location
• From the main navigation menu, press the
"Tools" icon. Select the "My Data" folder
icon, and then select "Set Home Location."
• You may enter your address directly, use
your current location as your home address, or choose from recently found
locations.
Edit Home Location
• From the main Navigation menu press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the "Tools" icon. Next, press the
"My Data" folder.
• You may enter a new address directly, use
your current location or choose from recently found locations.
235
MULTIMEDIA
• Press the “back arrow” icon multiple
times to return to the main navigation
menu.
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the
system. From the Main Navigation menu,
press the “Where To?” button on the
touchscreen, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the
touchscreen, then search for the additional stop. Select the destination you
wish to add from the given search results.
Following Your Route
Your route is marked with a magenta line on
the map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon
could appear as you travel on major roadways.
Following Your Route
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Distance To Next Turn
Current Location
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Current Speed
Drag Map For Different View
Your Location On The Map
Estimated Time Of Arrival
Navigation Main Menu
Adding A Via Point
To add a stop between the current location
and the end destination (Via Point), you must
be navigating a route.
236
• Press the “Go” button on the touchscreen,
then press "Add as a Via Point" button on
the touchscreen and press the "Done" button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
To take a detour, you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “back arrow” icon button on the
touchscreen multiple times to return to
the main navigation menu.
• Press the “Detour”
touchscreen.
button
on
the
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the
only reasonable option, the device might not
calculate a detour.
Acquiring Satellites
Info
The GPS Satellite strength bars indicate the
strength of your satellite reception.
• Press the “i” button on the touchscreen to
view detailed information about the current Sirius XM Satellite channel.
• Acquiring satellite signals can take a few minutes. When at least one of the bars is green,
your device has acquired satellite signals.
• You may experience delays receiving satellite signals when in areas with an obstructed view to the sky, such as garages,
tunnels, or large cities with tall buildings.
SIRIUSXM SATELLITE
RADIO/TRAVEL LINK
• SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the five (5) year
trial subscription included with your vehicle purchase.
• SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in
the United States.
• The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio mode.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push
the RADIO/MEDIA or RADIO button on the
faceplate, then press the “SAT” button on
the touchscreen.
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• SiriusXM offers the option to permanently
block
selected
channels.
Call
1-888-539-7474 and request the Family
Package.
• Uconnect 430/430N: Push the “MENU”
button on the faceplate while in SiriusXM
Satellite Radio Mode, then press the
“Channel Lock” to enable and/or disable
desired channels. The SEEK and SCAN
function will then only display channels
without Channel lock.
SAT Browse
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Favorites (SAT Favorites)
• You can save 50 favorite songs and 50 favorite artists.
Search/Browse
• Press the “magnifying glass” button on
the touchscreen to search/browse the
SiriusXM channel listing by Favorites and
Categories such as Song, Artist and Channel Name. The Search/Browse also allows
you to manage your Favorites.
Manage SAT Favorites
237
MULTIMEDIA
• Press the “Add Favorite” button on the
touchscreen to add either the song or the
artist of the currently playing program to
the SAT Favorites list. The favorite star will
appear in the upper right corner, below the
“SAT” button on the touchscreen.
Display SAT Favorites List
• Press the “Search/Browse” button on the
touchscreen and select “Favorites” from
the SAT Browse screen.
You may use the “LIST” button on the touchscreen to toggle between:
• Favorite Songs
• Favorite Artists
• Currently playing favorites
• You will see a favorite star indicator in the
upper right side of the screen below the
“SAT” button on the touchscreen and a
pop up will alert you that a favorite song or
artist is currently playing on one of the
SiriusXM satellite radio channels.
SAT Browse
• Press the desired favorites button on the
touchscreen to switch the SAT tuner to the
corresponding channel.
Favorites Alert
NOTE:
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for more information.
238
SAT Favorites
Replay
The time displayed below the bar indicates
how much time is present between the current buffer play position and the live broadcast.
• While you are in SAT mode, you can replay
44 minutes of the current SiriusXM channel (when the channel is changed, this
audio buffer is erased). Push the REPLAY
button to listen to the stored audio.
• You can press the on-screen controls to
pause and rewind audio playback, press
the SCAN button to preview each of the
tracks stored in the buffer, or select a track
from the list.
Replay Option
Play/Pause
Rewind/RW
Fast Forward/FW
Replay Time
Live
SAT Mode Replay
Option Description
Press to pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume playback.
Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to rewind continuously, then release to begin
playing content at that point.
Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast Forward/FW can only be used when content
has been previously rewound.
Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which your content lags the live channel.
Resumes playback of live content at any time while replaying rewound content.
239
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your
vehicle to send and receive information. This
information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps
as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if
the most recent version of vehicle software
(such as Uconnect software) is installed.
240
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all
of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be
possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,
or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to
your nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security
and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
– Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
software-update to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further
information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual on jeep.com/en/owners/manuals.
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION
Right Switch
Care And Maintenance
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Observe the following precautions to ensure
the system is fully operational:
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/CD/SXM.
• The display lens should not come into
contact with pointed or rigid objects which
could damage its surface; use a soft, dry
anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.
The steering wheel audio controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station or select the
next or previous CD track.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station (radio) or to change
CDs if equipped with a CD Player.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could damage it beyond repair.
Reception Conditions
The system is equipped with an anti-theft
protection system based on the exchange of
information with the electronic control unit
(Body Computer) on the vehicle.
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be interfered
with by the presence of mountains, buildings
or bridges, especially when you are far away
from the broadcaster.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Rearview
Of Steering Wheel)
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
Anti-theft Protection
This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the secret code from being entered
after the power supply has been disconnected.
241
MULTIMEDIA
If the check has a positive outcome, the
system will start to operate, whereas if the
comparison codes are not the same or if the
electronic control unit (Body Computer) is
replaced, the system will ask the user to enter
the secret code. See your authorized dealer
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED
iPod/USB/MP3
When connected to this feature:
There are many ways to play music from
iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through
your vehicle's sound system.
The remote USB port, located within the
center console, allows you to plug an iPod
into the vehicle's sound system.
Center Console USB
• Non-Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio
from devices connected to the USB port,
push the AUX button on the faceplate.
• Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio from
devices connected to the USB port, push
the MEDIA button on the faceplate, then
press the “AUX” or “iPod” button on the
touchscreen.
242
• The iPod can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod
or external devices contents.
• The iPod battery charges when plugged
into the USB port (if supported by the
specific audio device).
• Compatible iPod devices may also be controllable using voice commands.
Refer to the Owner's Manual on
jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
NOTE:
The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic,
Nano, Touch, and iPhone devices. The USB port
also supports playing music from compatible
external USB Mass Storage Class memory devices. Refer to UconnectPhone.com for a list
of tested iPod’s. Some iPod software versions
may not fully support the USB port features.
Please visit Apple’s website for iPod software
updates.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or
external device while driving. Failure to
follow this warning could result in a collision.
UCONNECT PHONE
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system with Voice Command Capability that allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone using simple voice commands
(see Voice Command section).
• To determine if your vehicle is equipped
with Uconnect Phone, push the
“Uconnect Phone” button
located
on the radio faceplate. If your vehicle has
this feature, you will hear a voice prompt.
If not, you will see a message on the radio
“Uconnect Phone not available.”
UconnectPhone.com
or
call,
1-800-465-2001
(English)
or
1-800-387-9983 (French). This site will provide specific instructions based on the type
of mobile phone being paired.
NOTE:
To access the tutorial, push the “Uconnect
. After the BEEP, say
Phone” button
“tutorial.” Push any button on the faceplate,
or press any button on the touchscreen, to
cancel the tutorial.
NOTE:
Pairing is a one - time initial setup before
using the phone. Prior to starting the pairing
procedure ensure all additional phones
within the vehicle have their Bluetooth disabled.
• Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia” in your Owner's Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
1. Activate Bluetooth on the mobile phone
you are pairing.
Phone Pairing
2. Push the “Phone”
button.
3. Wait for the “ready” prompt and BEEP.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. For Uconnect
Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit
UconnectPhone.com
or
call
1-877-855-8400. Canadian residents - visit
4. After the BEEP, say ”setup” or “Uconnect
device setup.”
5. After the BEEP, say “device pairing.”
243
MULTIMEDIA
• Next you will be asked to give this new
pairing a priority of 1 through 7 (up to
seven phones may be paired); 1 is the
highest and 7 is the lowest priority. The
system will only connect to the highest
priority phone that exists within the proximity of the vehicle.
Mobile Phone Pairing
6. After the BEEP, say “pair a device.”
7. Follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which
you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can say any four-digit PIN.
You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
• You will then be prompted to give the
phone pairing a name (each phone paired
should have a unique name).
244
• You will then need to start the pairing
procedure on your cell phone. Follow the
Bluetooth instructions in your cell phone
Owner's Manual to complete the phone
pairing setup.
Phonebook
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries
from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. Automatic Transfer is indicated by a green arrow at the bottom of
the screen. See UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.
Uconnect myPhone
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth
wireless phone connection is made to the
Uconnect Phone. For example, after you
start the vehicle.
NOTE:
The mobile phone may require authorization
prior to download.
• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone
will be downloaded and updated every
time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the
previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is
downloaded. The SIM card phonebook is
not part of the Mobile phonebook.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Making A Phone Call
• Push the “Phone” button
Receiving A Call — Accept (And End)
Changing The Volume
• When an incoming call rings/is announced
on Uconnect, push the “Phone”
.
button
• Start a dialogue by pushing the “Phone”
, then adjust the volume durbutton
ing a normal call.
• To end a call, push the “Phone”
.
button
• Use the radio ON/OFF VOLUME rotary
knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable
level while the Uconnect system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Uconnect is different than the audio
system.
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During
Call
• During a call, push the “Voice Command”
.
button
• After the BEEP, say “mute” (or “mute
off”).
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During a call, push the “Voice Command”
.
button
• After the BEEP, say “transfer call.”
.
• After the BEEP, say “dial” (or “call” a
name).
• After the BEEP, say number (or name).
WARNING!
• Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following applicable laws regarding phone
use. Your attention should be focused on
safely operating the vehicle. Failure to
do so may result in a collision causing
you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
• In an emergency, to use Uconnect
Phone, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on
• paired to Uconnect Phone
• have network coverage
245
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT VOICE
COMMAND
Voice Command Operation
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, HDD, Uconnect Phone, a
memo recorder, and supported portable media devices.
While In:
Main Menu
246
• When you push the “Voice Command”
button
located on the radio faceplate or steering wheel, you will hear a
beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command. If you do not say a command
within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of options. If you ever
want to interrupt the system while it lists
options, push the “Voice Command” but, listen for the BEEP, and say
ton
your command.
NOTE:
U.S. residents visit driveuconnect.com for
more info on which voice command features
apply to your vehicle. Canadian residents
visit driveuconnect.ca for more info on which
voice command features apply to your vehicle.
• Start a dialogue by pushing the “Voice
Command” button
, you will hear a
beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command. Below are a list of voice commands for each of the different modes:
Voice Command Example:
“Radio AM” (to switch to the AM radio mode)
“Radio FM” (to switch to the FM radio mode)
“Satellite Radio” (to switch to the Satellite radio mode)
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
“USB” (to switch to the USB mode)
“Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to the Bluetooth Streaming mode)
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
While In:
Radio Mode
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Mode
Disc Mode
Voice Command Example:
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number)
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
"Channel Name" (to change the channel by its spoken name)
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
247
MULTIMEDIA
While In:
Memo Mode
Voice Command Example:
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” The following are common voice commands for
this mode: “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may push the Voice
Command button
to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
— “Save” (to save the memo)
— “Continue” (to continue recording)
— “Delete” (to delete the recording)
— “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may push the Voice
Command button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
— “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
— “Next” (to play the next memo)
— “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
— “Delete” (to delete a memo)
— “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Voice Text Reply
If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command,
your Uconnect 430N radio may be able to
play incoming Short Message Service (SMS)
messages (text messages) through the vehicle's sound system. It also allows you to
respond by selecting from various predefined
phrases.
248
NOTE:
Not all phones are compatible with this feature. Refer to the phone compatibility list at
UconnectPhone.com. Connected mobile
phones must be bluetooth-compatible and
paired with your radio.
• Push the “Voice Command” button
and after the BEEP, say “SMS” to get
started.
NOTE:
To access the tutorial, push the “Voice Command” button
. After the BEEP, say
“tutorial.” Push any button on the faceplate
or press any button on the touchscreen to
cancel the tutorial.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following applicable laws regarding phone use.
Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in a collision causing you and others
to be severely injured or killed.
BLUETOOTH STREAMING
AUDIO
If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command,
your Bluetooth-equipped iPod devices, cell
phones or other media players, may also be
able to stream music to your vehicles speakers. Your connected device must be
Bluetooth-compatible, and paired with your
radio (see UconnectPhone.com for pairing
instructions).
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Non-Touchscreen Radios: Push the AUX button on the faceplate until "BT" or “Audio
Streaming” is displayed on the radio screen.
Touchscreen-Radios: Push the RADIO/MEDIA
or MEDIA button on the faceplate and then
press the “AUX” button on the touchscreen.
249
250
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING
SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . .252
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .252
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .253
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .253
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . .253
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . .252
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . .254
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . .252
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . .252
MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .254
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . .255
251
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure
to have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue
to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems
or the specific work you want done. If you've
had an accident or work done that is not on
your maintenance log, let the service advisor
know.
252
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must
have your vehicle by the end of the day,
discuss the situation with the service advisor
and list the items in order of priority. At many
authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factorytrained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner
of the authorized dealer. They want to know
if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.
For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract
for a vehicle to help protect you from the high
cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
The manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-
chased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require service after
the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
253
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve
any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the
terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
254
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer.
They are recommended for your vehicle in
order to help keep the vehicle operating at its
best.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll
free
at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE.,
West
Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
PUBLICATION ORDER
If you believe that your vehicle has a FORMS
In Canada
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
Warranty Booklet. United States customers may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at
www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link,
then select the “Owner’s Manual and
Glove Compartment Material” from the
left menu. You can also purchase a copy by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT
websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select
“Owner/Service Manuals”, then select
your desired model year and vehicle from
the drop down lists.
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you
prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or
Radio Manuals may be purchased by
visiting www.techauthority.com or by calling
1-877-890-4038
(U.S.)
or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master
Card, American Express and Discover orders are accepted.
255
256
INDEX
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Additives, Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . .104
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Enhanced Accident Response .109, 169
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . .169
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . .108
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . .106
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .109
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 124
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . .182
Air Conditioning Filter. . . . . . . . .46, 183
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .45
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . .182, 183
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . .182
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . .19, 72
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . .216
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .78
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .72
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . .19
Assist, Hill Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Audio Jack . . . . . . . . . . .224, 227, 231
Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 226
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . .32
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . .69
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .135, 182
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . .182
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . .180
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 217
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Axle Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Axle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 182
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . .70
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . .79
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 217
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . .135
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . .152, 153
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126, 152
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . .123
Cargo Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . .223, 227
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . .155
Chains, Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . .159, 189
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .123
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
257
INDEX
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . .121
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . .111
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . .117
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Older Children And Child Restraints .112
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . .223, 226, 229
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .128
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .242
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .216
258
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .216
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . .34
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . .124
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . .36
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . .75
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . .34
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . .167
Disarming, Security System. . . . . . . . .19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Driver's Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . .24, 26
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation . .
Traction Control System . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.33
.79
.78
.85
.81
. . . .142
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . .81
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 189
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Compartment Identification . . . . . .177
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .216
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .123
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .216
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . .69
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 169
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 126
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Fabric Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Filters
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .46, 183
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Turn Signal . . . . . . . .126, 154, 155
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . .129
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . .189
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . .216
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 154
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . .27
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 28
Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . .152
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . .137
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .167
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .144
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . .215, 216
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . .76, 144, 145
Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . .166
GPS Navigation (Uconnect GPS) . . . . .236
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . .152
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .153
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .34
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . .86
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . .
Information Center, Vehicle . . . .
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .
Integrated Power Module (Fuses).
Interior And Instrument Lights . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .17
. .67
. .32
. .66
.211
.156
. .35
259
INDEX
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . .210
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . .36
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . .249
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Jack Operation . . . . .159, 161, 162, 189
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Key, Programming . . . .
Key, Replacement. . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.18
.17
.13
.17
Lane Change Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126, 152
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 124
260
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . .34
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .85
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . .152, 153
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . .155
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . .34
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 154
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .152
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 153
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . .34
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . .86
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .72
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .71
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 153
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .73
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Turn Signal . . . . . .34, 126, 154, 155
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Locking Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . .182
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . .172
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . .131, 189
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . .189
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . .189, 217
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Media Center Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . .24
Memory Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . .24
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . .
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor, Tire Pressure System
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mopar Accessories . . . . . . .
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .32
. .32
. .33
. .33
. .33
. .32
. .87
.218
.218
.254
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) . . .235
Navigation Voice Prompt Volume . . . . .235
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . .215, 216
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . .69
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .71
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . .
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . .
Outlet
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . .
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual)
. . . .71
. . . .75
. . . .75
. . . .62
. . .165
. . .255
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placard, Tire And Loading Information
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . .
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . .
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.130
.123
.243
.194
. .20
. .64
. .33
. .62
. .48
.217
.101
.160
.101
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Radio
Presets . . . . . . . . . . .223, 226, 230
Radio 130
Operating Instructions Radio Mode .222
Radio 130 With Satellite Radio
Operating Instructions Radio Mode .225
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . .13, 16, 18
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . .223, 226
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Remote Sound System (Radio)
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . .15
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Reporting Safety Defects. . . . . . . . . .254
261
INDEX
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . .69
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . .
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . .
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . .
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio (Uconnect Studios) . .
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Energy Management Feature . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
262
.124
.125
.254
.123
.189
.123
.227
.172
.100
.101
.101
. .98
. .97
. .99
.101
.100
.101
. .96
.210
Seat Belt Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 124
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . .100
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 97, 98
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . .98
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . .99
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 26
Fold And Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . .27
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 28
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 28
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . .24, 26
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 26
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 72
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . .216
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .134
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . .131
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Shift Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Signals, Turn . . . . . . .34, 126, 154, 155
Sirius Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Sirius Travel Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . .204
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 202, 203
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .142
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 128
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .128
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . .129
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . .128
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . .128
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . .241
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 207
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Supplemental Restraint System - Air
Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . .
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . .
Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.104
.141
. .86
. .61
. .15
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Tire And Loading Information Placard . .194
Tire Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .125, 197, 202, 206
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . .200
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 189
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
General Information . . . . . . .197, 202
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .198
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . .159, 162, 189
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .87
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .73
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 197
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .160, 202, 203
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .200
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . .214
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .189
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Touchscreen Radio
Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio . .234
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . .169
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 167
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .148
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Trailer Sway Control (TSC). . . . . . . . . .86
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . .146
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Transaxle
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
263
INDEX
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . .137
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .135, 180
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .200
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . .34, 154, 155
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . .99
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Uconnect Voice Command. . . . . . . . .246
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . .206
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . .179
264
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . .214
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 207
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Voice Prompt Volume
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Volume
Navigation Voice Prompt . . . . . . . .235
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . .203
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . . . . . . .203
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Windows
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . .36, 179
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .185
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . .185
Wiper, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
If you are the first registered retail
owner of your vehicle, you may
obtain a complimentary printed copy
of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect Manuals or Warranty
Booklets by calling 1 877 426-5337
(U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, resulting in a
collision and personal injury. FCA US
LLC strongly recommends that the
driver use extreme caution when
using any device or feature that may
take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such
as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is
2703574_17d_Wrangler_UG_ENG_032717.indd 2
dangerous and could lead to
a serious collision. Texting while
driving is also dangerous and
should never be done while the
vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to
devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
Important:
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the
important features of your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be
found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website
on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find
it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can
purchase replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.
This guide has been prepared to help
you get quickly acquainted with your
new Jeep brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common
questions. However, it is not a substitute
for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels
in your vehicle.
Driving and Alcohol:
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below
the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Not all features shown in this
guide may apply to your vehicle. For
additional information on accessories
to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer.
3/27/17 10:10 AM
Whether it’s providing
information about specific
product features, taking a
tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident,
or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an
important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the
app, select your make and model and
enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google
Play and enter the search keyword
“JEEP” (U.S. market only).
17JK72-926-AA
Wrangler
Fourth Edition
User Guide
Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)
jeep.com /en /owners provides
special offers tailored to your
needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just
create an account and check
back often.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the
Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet by visiting:
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals or
www.jeep.com/en/warranty (U.S.);
www.owners.mopar.ca/en (Canada).
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2703574_17d_Wrangler_UG_ENG_032717.indd 1
2 01 7 W RA N G L E R U S E R G U I D E
3/27/17 10:10 AM